2003 Infiniti Q45 OM

FOREWORD

Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinking Additionally, a separate Customer Care and about vehicle design. It integrates advanced engi- Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain neering and superior craftsmanship with a simple, how to resolve any concerns you may have WARNING refined aesthetic sensitivity associated with tradi- with your vehicle, as well as clarify your tional Japanese culture. rights under your state’s lemon law. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION The result is a different notion of luxury and beauty. INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfying The car itself is important, but also is the sense of ownership experience for as long as you own your REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! car. Should you have any questions regarding your harmony that the vehicle evokes in its driver, and Follow these important driving rules the sense of satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI INFINITI or your INFINITI retailer, please contact our Consumer Affairs department at 1-800-662- to help ensure a safe and comfort- — from the way it looks and drives to the high level 6200. In Hawaii 1-808-836-0888 (Oahu number). of dealer service. able trip for you and your passen- In Canada 1-800-361-4792. Thank you. gers! To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the ț fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s NEVER drive under the influence Manual immediately. It explains all of the features, READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE of alcohol or drugs. SAFELY controls and performance characteristics of your ț ALWAYS observe posted speed INFINITI; it also provides important instructions and Before driving your vehicle please read your limits and never drive too fast for safety information. Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure conditions. familiarity with controls and maintenance re- A separate Warranty Information Booklet is quirements, assisting you in the safe opera- ț ALWAYS use your seat belts and included in your Owner’s literature portfolio. tion of your vehicle. Always carry it with you when you take your appropriate child restraint sys- INFINITI to an authorized retailer. The War- tems. Pre-teen children should be ranty Information Booklet contents provide seated in the rear seat. complete information about all warranties ț covering this vehicle, the requirements to ALWAYS provide information keep the warranties in effect as well as the about the proper use of vehicle INFINITI Roadside Assistance program.

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ WHEN READING THE safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. MANUAL WARNING This manual includes information for all ț ALWAYS review this Owner’s options available on this model. There- This is used to indicate the presence Manual for important safety infor- fore, you may find some information of a hazard that could cause death or mation. that does not apply to your vehicle. serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must All information, specifications and illustra- be followed precisely. tions in this manual are those in effect at the MODIFICATION OF YOUR time of printing. INFINITI reserves the right to VEHICLE change specifications or design at any time This vehicle should not be modified. without notice. CAUTION Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may IMPORTANT INFORMATION This is used to indicate the presence even violate governmental regula- ABOUT THIS MANUAL of a hazard that could cause minor or tions. In addition, damage or perfor- You will see various symbols in this manual. moderate personal injury or damage mance problems resulting from They are used in the following ways: to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce modification will not be covered un- the risk, the procedures must be fol- der the INFINITI warranties. lowed carefully.

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constitu- ents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to SII0151 the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro- If you see this symbol, it means Do not do ductive harm. this or Do not let this happen.

© 2002 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ ੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TABLE OF CONTENTS

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS ...... 1-1 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS ...... 2-1 PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS...... 3-1 MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS ...... 4-1 STARTING AND DRIVING...... 5-1 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ...... 6-1 APPEARANCE AND CARE...... 7-1 DO-IT-YOURSELF ...... 8-1 MAINTENANCE ...... 9-1 TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION ...... 10-1 INDEX ...... 11-1

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ ੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 1 SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

Seats...... 1-2 Pregnant women...... 1-28 Front power seat adjustment ...... 1-2 Injured persons...... 1-28 Rear power seat adjustment (if so Three-point type seat belt...... 1-28 equipped) ...... 1-4 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-32 Head restraint adjustment...... 1-5 Seat belt maintenance...... 1-32 Active head restraint (Front seats) ...... 1-6 Child restraints ...... 1-32 Supplemental restraint system...... 1-7 Precautions on child restraints...... 1-32 Precautions on supplemental restraint Installation on rear seat center or outboard system...... 1-7 positions...... 1-35 Supplemental air bag warning labels... 1-21 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil- Supplemental air bag warning light..... 1-21 dren) system...... 1-40 Seat belts...... 1-23 Top tether strap child restraint...... 1-41 Precautions on seat belt usage...... 1-23 Installation on front passenger seat .... 1-43 Child safety ...... 1-26

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

SEATS ries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. ț For most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See “Pre- cautions on seat belt usage” later in this section.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUST- MENT SIR0091 WARNING

WARNING shoulder belt will not be against ț Do not adjust the driver’s seat your body. In an accident you while driving so full attention may ț Do not ride in a moving vehicle could be thrown into it and receive be given to vehicle operation. when the seatback is reclined. neck or other serious inju- This can be dangerous. The

1-2

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

Forward and backward Reclining ț Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

Operating tips ț The seat motor has an auto-reset overload SIR0153 SIR0154 protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate Moving the switch forward or backward will Move the recline switch backward until the the switch. slide the seat forward or backward to the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seat- ț Do not operate the power seat for a long desired position. back forward again, move the switch forward period of time when the engine is off. This and move your body forward. The seatback will discharge the battery. will move forward.

1-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

Seat lifter (Driver’s seat) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat) REAR POWER SEAT ADJUST- MENT (if so equipped) Forward and backward Press the switch to move the seat forward or back. The seats move continuously while the switch is being pressed.

SIR0155 SIP0275

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or The lumbar support feature provides lower down to adjust the angle and height of the seat back support to the driver. Move the switch cushion. forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.

SIR0151

1-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

Automatic return Automatic reverse operation When the driver’s seat is moved backward by the automatic drive positioner system, the rear left side seat will automatically move backward even if the rear seat automatic return switch is in the CANCEL position. This operation maintains rear passenger foot and knee space. HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUST- SIR0152 MENT When the ON portion of the automatic return switch on the rear armrest is pressed, the WARNING automatic return function is activated. When a rear door is opened, the rear seat on Head restraints should be adjusted that side automatically slides all the way back, properly as they may provide signifi- facilitating entry and exit. cant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check SIR0099 Pressing the CANCEL side of the switch will the adjustment after someone else deactivate the automatic return function. uses the seat. To raise the head restraint, simply pull it up. To lower, push the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

1-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

To adjust the head restraint forward and ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT ț backward, push it in the direction required. (Front seats) Active head restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident. ț Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function.

SIR0144 SIR0113 The active head restraint moves outward and Adjust the head restraints so the center is level forward utilizing the force that the seatback with the center of your ears. WARNING receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reduc- ț Always adjust the head restraints ing its backward movement and helping ab- properly as specified in the previ- sorb some of the forces that may lead to ous section. Failure to do so can whiplash type injuries. reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint. Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most.

1-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

Active head restraints operate only in certain Supplemental side-impact air bag sys- for instructions and precautions on seat belt rear-end collisions. After the collision, the tem: This system can help cushion the usage.) head restraints return to their original posi- impact force to the chest area of the driver and After turning the ignition key to the ON tions. front passenger in certain side impact colli- position, the supplemental air bag sions. The front seat side-impact supplemen- Properly adjust the active head restraints as warning light illuminates. The supple- tal air bags are designed to inflate on the side described in the previous section. mental air bag warning light will turn off where the vehicle is impacted. after about 7 seconds if the systems are SUPPLEMENTAL Supplemental side-impact curtain air operational. RESTRAINT SYSTEM bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLE- MENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions. The curtain This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) side-impact air bags are designed to inflate on section contains important information con- the side where the vehicle is impacted. cerning the driver and passenger front impact supplemental air bags, front seat side-impact These supplemental restraint systems are de- supplemental air bags, curtain side-impact air signed to supplement the crash protection bags and front seat pre-tensioner seat belts. provided by the driver and passenger seat Supplemental front impact air bag sys- belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat tem: This system can help cushion the belts should always be correctly worn and the impact force to the face and chest of the driver occupant seated a suitable distance away from and front passenger in certain frontal colli- the steering wheel, instrument panel and door sions. finishers. (See “Seat belts” later in this section

1-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

mental front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back SIR0092 against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. WARNING frontal collision. Always wear Always use the seat belts. your seat belts to help reduce the ț ț The supplemental front air bags risk or severity of injury in various The driver and front passenger ordinarily will not inflate in the kinds of accidents. seat belt buckles are equipped event of a side impact, rear im- with sensors that detect if the ț pact, roll over, or lower severity The seat belts and the supple- seat belts are fastened. The air

1-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags based on belt usage. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. ț Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates. SIR0093

1-9

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

SIR0006 SIR0007 SIR0008

1-10

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

SIR0009 SIR0010 SIR0011

1-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

An inflating supplemental front WARNING air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child re- ț Never let children ride unre- straints” later in this section for strained or extend their hands or details. face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. ț Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental

front air bags, side air bags or SIR0150 curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible. ț Also, never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. SIR0059

1-12

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

and curtain side-impact air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. SIR0121 ț The seat belts and the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag are most effective when you are sitting well SIR0094 back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag inflate with great WARNING force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the Supplemental side air bag and cur- SIR0122 tain side-impact air bag: seatback of the front seat or near ț The supplemental side air bag the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or

1-13

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. ț When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. SIR0145A ț Do not use seat covers on the Supplemental front air bag sys- certification requirements under U.S. regula- front seatbacks. They may inter- tem tions. They are also permitted in Canada. The fere with supplemental side air optional certification allows front air bags to The driver supplemental air bag is located in bag inflation. be designed to inflate somewhat less force- the center of the steering wheel; the front fully than previously. However, all of the passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in information, cautions and warnings in the instrument panel above the glove box. this manual still apply and must be These systems are designed to meet optional followed. The front air bags are designed to

1-14

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, contact your INFINITI retailer. occupants. Because of this, the force of the front although they may inflate if the forces in air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a another type of collision are similar to those of the occupant is too close to or is against the air fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by a higher severity frontal impact. They may not bag module during inflation. The air bag will release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle deflate quickly after the collision is over. and does not indicate a fire. Care should be damage (or lack of it) is not always an taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation After turning the ignition key to the ON indication of proper supplemental air bag and choking. Those with a history of a breath- position, the supplemental air bag operation. warning light illuminates. The air bag ing condition should get fresh air promptly. warning light will turn off after about 7 The supplemental air bag system has dual Supplemental front air bags, along with the seconds if the system is operational. stage inflators for both the driver and passen- use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact ger air bags. The system monitors information force on the face and chest of the front WARNING from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis occupants. They can help save lives and sensor unit and seat belt buckle sensors that reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating ț Do not place any objects on the detect if the seat belts are fastened, inflator front air bag may cause facial abrasions or steering wheel pad or on the in- operation is based on the severity of a collision other injuries. Front air bags do not provide strument panel. Also, do not place and whether the seat belts are being used. Only restraint to the lower body. any objects between any occupant one front air bag may inflate in a crash, and the steering wheel or instru- depending on the crash severity and whether The seat belts should be correctly worn and the ment panel. Such objects may be- the front occupants are belted or unbelted. This driver and passenger seated upright as far as come dangerous projectiles and does not indicate improper performance of the practical away from the steering wheel or instru- cause injury if the supplemental system. If you have any questions about the ment panel. The supplemental front air bags front air bag inflates. performance of your air bag system, please inflate quickly in order to help protect the front

1-15

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

ț Right after inflation, several air ample, do not change the steer- ț A cracked windshield should be bag system components will be ing wheel and the instrument replaced immediately by a quali- hot. Do not touch them; you may panel assembly by placing mate- fied repair facility. A cracked severely burn yourself. rial over the steering wheel pad windshield could affect inflation ț No unauthorized changes should and above the instrument panel, of the supplemental air bag be made to any components or or by installing additional trim system. wiring of the supplemental front material around the air bag sys- air bag system. This is to prevent tem. When selling your vehicle, we request that you accidental inflation of the air bag ț Work around and on the supple inform the buyer about the supplemental front or damage to the air bag system. mental front air bag system air bag system and guide the buyer to the ț Do not make unauthorized should be done by an INFINITI appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. changes to your vehicle’s electri- retailer. Installation of electrical cal system, suspension system or equipment should also be done front end structure. This could by an INFINITI retailer. The yel- affect proper operation of the low Supplemental Restraint Sys- supplemental front air bag system (SRS) wiring should not be tem. modified or disconnected. Unau- thorized electrical test equipment ț Tampering with the supplemental and probing devices should not front air bag system may result in be used on the air bag system. serious personal injury. For ex-

1-16

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

Supplemental side air bag and followed. The supplemental side air bags Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion curtain side-impact air bag sys- and curtain side-impact air bags are designed the impact force to the head of occupants in tem to inflate in higher severity side collisions, the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious although they may inflate if the forces in injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and another type of collision are similar to those of curtain side-impact air bag may cause abra- a higher severity side impact. They are de- sions or other injuries. Supplemental side air signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle bags and curtain side-impact air bags do not is impacted. They may not inflate in certain provide restraint to the lower body. side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) The seat belts should be correctly worn and is not always an indication of proper supple- the driver and passenger seated upright as far mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air as practical away from the side air bag. Rear bag operation. seat passengers should be seated as far away SIR0146 as practical from the door finishers and side When the supplemental side air bag and roof rails. The side air bags and curtain The supplemental side air bags are located in curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to the outside of the seatback of the front seats. loud noise may be heard, followed by release help protect the front occupants. Because of The supplemental curtain side-impact air bags of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does this, the force of the side air bag and curtain not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to side-impact air bag inflating can increase the are located in the side roof rails. These inhale it, as it may cause irritation and risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or systems are designed to meet voluntary choking. Those with a history of a breathing is against, these air bag modules during guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to condition should get fresh air promptly. inflation. The side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag will deflate quickly after the out-of-position occupants. However, all of Supplemental side air bags, along with the collision is over. the information, cautions and warnings use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact in this manual still apply and must be force on the chest of the front occupants. After turning the ignition key to the ON

1-17

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The air bag WARNING tem. This is to prevent accidental warning light will turn off after about 7 inflation of the side air bag and seconds if the systems are operational. ț Do not place any objects near the curtain air bag or damage to the seatback of the front seats. Also, side air bag and curtain side- do not place any objects (an um- impact air bag system. brella, bag, etc.) between the ț Do not make unauthorized front door finisher and the front changes to your vehicle’s electri- seat. Such objects may become cal system, suspension system or dangerous projectiles and cause side panel. This could affect injury if the side air bag inflates. proper operation of the supple- ț Right after inflation, several side mental side air bag and curtain air bag and curtain side-impact side-impact air bag system. air bag system components will ț Tampering with the supplemental be hot. Do not touch them; you system may result in serious per- may severely burn yourself. sonal injury. For example, do not ț No unauthorized changes should change the front seat by placing be made to any components or material near the seatback or by wiring of this side air bag and installing additional trim mate- curtain side-impact air bag sys- rial, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.

1-18

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

the buyer to the appropriate sections in this ț Work around and on the side air Owner’s Manual. belt system. This is to prevent bag and curtain side-impact air accidental activation of the pre- bag system should be done by an Pre-tensioner seat belt system tensioner seat belt or damage to INFINITI retailer. Installation of (For front seats) the pre-tensioner seat belt opera- electrical equipment should also tion. Tampering with the pre- be done by an INFINITI retailer. WARNING tensioner seat belt system may The SRS wiring harnesses* result in serious personal injury. should not be modified or discon- ț The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot ț Work around and on the preten- nected. Unauthorized electrical be reused after activation. It must sioner system should be done by test equipment and probing de- be replaced together with the re- an INFINITI retailer. Installation vices should not be used on the tractor as a unit. of electrical equipment should side air bag system. ț If the vehicle becomes involved in also be done by an INFINITI re- * The SRS wiring harnesses are a frontal collision but the pre- tailer. Unauthorized electrical covered with yellow insulation ei- tensioner is not activated, be sure test equipment and probing de- ther just before the harness con- to have the pre-tensioner system vices should not be used on the nectors or over the complete har- checked and, if necessary, re- pre-tensioner seat belt system. ness for easy identification. placed by your INFINITI retailer. ț If you need to dispose of the ț pre-tensioner or scrap the ve- When selling your vehicle, we request that you No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or hicle, contact an INFINITI re- inform the buyer about the side air bag and tailer. Correct pretensioner dis- curtain side-impact air bag system and guide wiring of the pre-tensioner seat

1-19

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

history of a breathing condition should get posal procedures are set forth in fresh air promptly. the appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect disposal proce- If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner dures could cause personal in- system, the supplemental air bag warning jury. light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system turned to the ON or START position. In this activates in conjunction with the supplemental case, the pre-tensioner seat belt may not front air bag. Working with the seat belt function properly. They must be checked and retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt the repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest instant the vehicle becomes involved in cer- INFINITI retailer. tain types of collisions, thereby restraining When selling your vehicle, we request that you seat occupants. inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt system and guide the buyer to the belt’s retractor. These seat belts are used the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

1-20

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS WARNING LIGHT

SIR0132

The supplemental air bag warning light, dis- playing in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental front air SIR0096D bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems, and pre- Warning labels about the supplemental front air bag and supplemental side-impact air bag tensioner seat belt. The circuits monitored by systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the air bag warning light are the diagnosis the illustration. sensor unit, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side- impact air bag modules, and all related wiring,

1-21

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS and pre-tensioner seat belt. tensioner seat belt may not operate properly. inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement They must be checked and repaired. Take your of these systems should be done only by an After turning the ignition key to the ON vehicle to the nearest INFINITI retailer. INFINITI retailer. position, the supplemental air bag warning When maintenance work is required on the light illuminates. The supplemental air bag vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, side warning light will turn off after about 7 WARNING air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, related seconds if the system is operational. parts and pre-tensioner seat belt should be If the supplemental air bag warning If any of the following conditions occur, the pointed out to the person conducting the light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side maintenance. The ignition key should always supplemental front air bag, supple- be in the LOCK position when working under air bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys- mental side air bag, curtain side- the hood or inside the vehicle. tems, and pre-tensioner seat belt need servic- impact air bag systems and/or pre- ing: tensioner seat belt will not operate in ț The supplemental air bag warning light an accident. WARNING remains on after approximately 7 seconds. ț Once the supplemental front air ț The supplemental air bag warning light Repair and replacement proce- bag, side air bag or curtain side- flashes intermittently. dure impact air bag has inflated, the air ț The supplemental air bag warning light The supplemental front air bags, supplemental bag module will not function again does not come on at all. side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and and must be replaced. Addition- pre-tensioner seat belt are designed to activate ally, if any of the supplemental Under these conditions, the supplemental on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, front air bags activate, the acti- front air bags, supplemental side air bags, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag vated pre-tensioner seat belt must curtain side-impact air bags and/or pre- warning light will remain illuminated after

1-22

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

also be replaced. The air bag INFINITI Service Manual. Incor- module and pre-tensioner seat rect disposal procedures could belt system should be replaced by cause personal injury. an INFINITI retailer. The air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belt system cannot be repaired. SEAT BELTS ț The supplemental front air bag, PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT side air bag and curtain side- USAGE impact air bag systems and pre- Your chances of being injured or killed in an tensioner seat belt system should accident and/or the severity of injury may be be inspected by an INFINITI re- greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat tailer if there is any damage to belt and it is properly adjusted. INFINITI the front end or side portion of the strongly encourages you and all of your vehicle. passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a ț If you need to dispose of these supplemental air bag. supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI Most states, all provinces and territo- retailer. ries require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven. Correct disposal procedures areset forth in the appropriate

1-23

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

ness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. ț Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your SIR0125 shoulder. ț Position the lap belt as low and be properly restrained in the rear snug as possible AROUND THE WARNING seat and, if appropriate, in a child HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt restraint. worn too high could increase the ț Every person who drives or rides risk of internal injuries in an ț The belt should be properly ad- in this vehicle should use a seat accident. belt at all times. Children should justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effective-

1-24

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

SIR0102 SIR0016

effectiveness. ț Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- ț If the seat belt warning light ț Do not allow more than one per- curely fastened to the proper glows continuously while the ig- son to use the same belt. buckle. nition is turned ON with all doors ț Never carry more people in the closed and all seat belts fas- ț Do not wear the belt inside out or vehicle than there are seat belts. tened, it may indicate a malfunc- twisted. Doing so may reduce its

1-25

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

and must be replaced together damage or improper operation is with the retractor. See your noted. INFINITI retailer. ț All child restraints and attaching ț Removal and installation of the hardware should be inspected af- pre-tensioner seat belt system ter any collision. Always follow components should be done by an the restraint manufacturer’s in- INFINITI retailer. spection instructions and replacement recommendations. The ț All seat belt assemblies including child restraints should be re- retractors and attaching hardware placed if they are damaged. should be inspected after any collision by your INFINITI retailer. INFINITI recommends that all CHILD SAFETY SIR0014 seat belt assemblies in use dur- Children need adults to help protect ing a collision be replaced unless them. They need to be properly re- the collision was minor and the tion in the system. Have the sys- belts show no damage and con- strained. tem checked by an INFINITI re- tinue to operate properly. Seat The proper restraint depends on the child’s tailer. belt assemblies not in use during size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and ț Once the pre-tensioner has acti- a collision should also be in- less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in vated, it cannot be reused spected and replaced if either rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who out-

1-26

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS grow rear facing child restraints. should be used for maximum protection. follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. INFINITI recommends that all preteens WARNING and children be restrained in the rear Larger children seat. According to accident statistics, Children who are too large for child restraints Infants and children need special children are safer when properly re- should be seated and restrained by the seat protection. The vehicle’s seat belts strained in the rear seat than in the front belts which are provided. may not fit them properly. The shoul- seat. der belt may come too close to the If the child’s seating position has a shoulder This is especially important because face or neck. The lap belt may not fit belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use your vehicle has a supplemental re- over their small hip bones. In an ac- of a booster seat (commercially available) may straint system (air bag system) for the cident. An improperly fitting seat belt help overcome this. The booster seat should front passenger. See “Supplemental re- could cause serious or fatal injury. raise the child so that the shoulder belt is straint system” earlier in this section for Always use appropriate child re- properly positioned across the top, middle precautions. straints. portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low Infants and small children on the hips. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it All US states and provinces of Canada require INFINITI recommends that infants and small complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety the use of approved child restraints for infants children be placed in child restraints that Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety and small children. (See “Child restraints” comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the later in this section.) Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face In addition, there are many types of child Standards. You should choose a child re- and neck, use the shoulder belt without the restraints available for larger children which straint which fits your vehicle and always booster seat.

1-27

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check ț For most effective protection WARNING with your doctor for specific recommendations. when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit Never let a child stand or kneel on THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT well back in the seat and adjust any seat and do not allow a child in the seat belt properly. the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously WARNING injured or killed in an accident or Fastening the seat belts ț Every person who drives or rides sudden stop. 1. Adjust the seat. in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. PREGNANT WOMEN ț Do not ride in a moving vehicle INFINITI recommends that pregnant women when the seatback is reclined. use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn This can be dangerous. The snug, and always position the lap belt as low shoulder belt will not be against as possible around the hips, not the waist, and your body. In an accident you place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and could be thrown into it and re- across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder ceive neck or other serious inju- belt over your abdominal area. Contact your ries. You could also slide under SIR0126 doctor for specific recommendations. the lap belt and receive serious INJURED PERSONS internal injuries. INFINITI recommends that injured persons

1-28

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

and allow you some freedom of movement in the seat.

SIR0127

SIR0019 SIR0061

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor 3. Position the lap belt portion low and and insert the tongue into the buckle until snug on the hips as shown. it snaps. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the The retractor is designed to lock during retractor to take up extra slack. a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pull- The front passenger and rear seat belts have a ing motion will permit the belt to move, cinching mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking

1-29

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS mode. When the cinching mechanism is Unfastening the seat belts Checking seat belt operation activated the seat belt cannot be withdrawn Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock again until the seat belt tongue is detached belt movement by two separate methods: from the buckle and fully retracted. For additional information, see “Child restraints” later ț when the belt is pulled quickly from the in this section. retractor. The automatic locking mode should be ț when the vehicle slows down rapidly. used only for child restraint installation. To increase your confidence in the belts, During normal seat belt use by an occu- check their operation as follows: pant, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause un- ț grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly comfortable seat belt tension. forward. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. WARNING If the retractor does not lock during this check SIR0021 or if you have any question about belt When fastening the seat belts, be operation, see your INFINITI retailer. certain that seatbacks are completely To unfasten the belt, press the button on the secured in the latched position. If buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract. they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

1-30

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

Center of rear seat Shoulder belt height adjustment injury in an accident. Selecting correct set of seat belts: (For front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. See earlier in “Seat belts” for precautions on seat belt usage.

WARNING

ț After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move SIR0116 the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely To adjust, push the button, and then move the fixed in position. shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, ț The shoulder belt anchor height so that the belt passes over the center of the SIR0159 should be adjusted to the position shoulder. The belt should be away from your The center seat belt buckle is identified by the best for you. Failure to do so may face and neck, but not falling off of your CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can reduce the effectiveness of the shoulder. Release the button to lock the be fastened only into the center seat belt entire restraint system and in- shoulder belt anchor into position. buckle. crease the chance or severity of

1-31

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may use an extender. Such unneces- retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt If, because of body size or driving position, it sary use could result in serious guide with a clean, dry cloth. is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder personal injury in the event of an belt and fasten it, an extender is available accident. ț Periodically check to see that the which is compatible with the installed seat seat belt and the metal components ț Never use seat belt extenders to belts. The extender adds approximately 8 in such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flex- install child restraints. If the child (200 mm) of length and may be used for either ible wires and anchors work properly. If restraint is not secured properly, the driver or front passenger seating position. loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other the child could be seriously in- See your INFINITI retailer for assistance if the jured in a collision or a sudden damage on the webbing are found, the extender is required. stop. entire belt assembly should be replaced. CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNING SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE- STRAINTS ț Only INFINITI belt extenders, ț To clean the seat belt webbings, apply made by the same company which a mild soap solution or any non-caustic made the original equipment solution recommended for gently cleaning WARNING belts, should be used with the cloth upholstery or carpets. Then brush it, INFINITI belts. wipe with a cloth and allow it to dry in the ț Infants and small children should shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract always be placed in an appropri- ț Adults and children who can use until they are completely dry. ate child restraint while riding in the standard seat belt should not the vehicle. Failure to use a child ț If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide

1-32

੬ 02.11.18/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

When selecting any child restraint system, restraint can result in serious in- statistics, children are safer when keep the following points in mind: jury or death. properly restrained in the rear ț choose only a restraint with a label certi- ț seat than in the front seat. Infants and small children should fying that it complies with Federal Motor ț never be carried on your lap. It is An improperly installed child re- Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian not possible for even the stron- straint could lead to serious in Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. gest adult to resist the forces of a jury or death in an accident. ț severe accident. The child could check the child restraint in your vehicle to be crushed between the adult and be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s In general, child restraints are designed to be parts of the vehicle. Also, do not seat and seat belt system. installed with the lap portion of a three-point put the same seat belt around ț if the child restraint is compatible with type seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is both your child and yourself. your vehicle, place your child in the child equipped with a universal child restraint lower restraint and check the various adjust- ț Never install a rear facing child anchor system, referred to as the LATCH ments to be sure the child restraint is restraint in the front seat. An in- (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) compatible with your child. Always follow flating supplemental front air bag system. Some child restraints include two all recommended procedures. could seriously injure or kill your rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that child. A rear facing child restraint can be connected to these lower anchors. For All US states and provinces of Canada must only be used in the rear seat. details, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and require that infants and small children ț INFINITI recommends that the Tether for Children) SYSTEM” later in this be restrained in approved child re- child restraint be installed in the section. straints at all times while the vehicle is being operated. rear seat. According to accident Child restraints for infants and children of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers.

1-33

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

WARNING ț Adjustable seatbacks should be restraint. If you must install a positioned to fit the child re- front facing child restraint in the ț Improper use of a child restraint straint, but as upright as pos- front seat. See “Installation on can increase the risk or severity of sible. front passenger seat” later in this section for details. injury for both the infant or child ț After attaching the child restraint, and other occupants in the vehicle. test it before you place the child ț When your child restraint is not in ț Follow all of the child restraint in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try use, store it in the trunk or keep it manufacturer’s instructions for to tug it forward and check to see secured with a seat belt to pre- installation and use. When pur- if the belt holds the restraint in vent it from being thrown around chasing a child restraint, be sure place. The child restraint should in case of a sudden stop or acci- to select one which will fit your not move more than 1 inch. If the dent. child and vehicle. It may not be restraint is not secure, tighten the possible to properly install some belt as necessary, or put the re- types of child restraints in your straint in another seat and test it CAUTION vehicle. again. ț Remember that a child restraint left ț If the child restraint is not an- For a front facing child restraint, in a closed vehicle can become very chored properly, the risk of a check to make sure the shoulder hot. Check the seating surface and child being injured in a collision belt does not go in front of the buckles before placing your child in or a sudden stop greatly child’s face or neck. If it does, put the child restraint. increases. the shoulder belt behind the child

1-34

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT CENTER OR OUTBOARD POSI- TIONS Front facing

WARNING

ț The three-point belt on your ve- SIR0117 SIR0118 hicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The used when installing a child re- direction of the child restraint depends on straint. the type of the child restraint and the size ț Failure to do so will result in the of the child. Always follow the restraint child restraint not being properly manufacturer’s instructions. secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat, follow these steps:

1-35

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

SIR0043 SIR0039A SIR0062

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the 4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt child restraint and insert it into the buckle belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt to remove any slack in the belt. until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be retractor is in the automatic locking mode sure to follow the child restraint manufac- (child restraint mode). It reverts back to turer’s instructions for belt routing. emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

1-36

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any ț more belt webbing out of the retractor, the Failure to do so will result in the belt is in the automatic locking mode. child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or oth- 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint erwise be unsecured and cause is properly secured prior to each use. If the injury to the child in a sudden lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 stop or collision. through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the When you install a child restraint in a rear seat belt is allowed to wind back into the outboard or center seat, follow these steps: retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact. SIR0042 Rear facing 5. Before placing the child in the child WARNING restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to ț The three-point belt on your ve- make sure that it is securely held in place. hicle is equipped with a locking It should not move more than 1 inch. mode retractor which must be SIR0119 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic used when installing a child restraint. 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The locking mode by trying to pull more belt direction of the child restraint depends on

1-37

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

SIR0120

SIR0046 SIR0045A

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the child restraint and insert it into the buckle belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be retractor is in the automatic locking mode sure to follow the child restraint manufac- (child restraint mode). It reverts back to turer’s instructions for belt routing. emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

1-38

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact.

SIR0047 SIR0048

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt 5. Before placing the child in the child to remove any slack in the belt. restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt

1-39

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) in an accident. the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped SYSTEM ț Do not secure a child restraint in with special anchor points that are used with the center rear seating position LATCH system compatible child restraints. using the child restraint lower Check your child restraint for a label stating anchors. The child restraint will that it is compatible with the LATCH system. not be secured properly. This information may also be in the child ț The LATCH system anchors are restraint owner’s manual. If you have such a designed to withstand only those child restraint, refer to the illustration for the loads imposed by correctly fitted seating positions equipped with LATCH sys- child restraints. Under no circum- tem anchors which can be used to secure the stance are they to be used for child restraint. SIR0160 adult seat belts or harnesses. The LATCH system anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A WARNING Some child restraints include two rigid or label is attached to the seatback to help you webbing-mounted attachments that can be locate the LATCH system anchors. ț Attach LATCH system compatible connected to two anchors located at certain Some child restraints may also require the use child restraints only at the loca- seating positions in your vehicle. This system of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap tions shown. If a child restraint is is known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and child restraint” later in this section for instal- not secured properly, your child Tether for Children) system. This system may lation instructions. could be seriously injured or killed also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do When installing a child restraint, carefully read

1-40

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS and follow the instructions in this manual and the anchor points on the seat. If the child TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE- those supplied with the child restraint. restraint is equipped with a top tether, see STRAINT “Top tether strap child restraint” later in When you install a LATCH system compatible this section for installation instructions. child restraint to the lower anchor attachments, follow these steps. 2. After attaching the child restraint and before placing the child in it, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side and WARNING tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. It should Inspect the lower anchors by insert- not move more than 1 inch. ing your fingers into the lower anchor 3. Check to make sure that the child restraint area and feeling to make sure there SIR0148 is properly secured prior to each use. are no obstructions over the LATCH system anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. WARNING The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH system anchors The child restraint anchor points are are obstructed. designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circum- 1. To install the LATCH system compatible stances are they to be used for adult child restraint, insert the child restraint seat belts or harnesses. LATCH system anchor attachments into

1-41

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

provides the straightest installation. Tighten ț After removing a rear seat head the tether strap according to the manufactur- restraint for top tether installa- er’s instruction to remove any slack. tion, store it securely to prevent it from causing injury to passengers For best child restraint fit see the child or damage to the vehicle in case restraint installation instructions in this sec- of sudden braking or an accident. tion and the child restraint manufacturer’s Always replace it and adjust prop- instructions. erly when top tether is no longer Anchor point locations in use. Anchor points are located under the rear parcel shelf finisher. If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it If you have any questions when install- must be secured to the anchor point provided ing a top strap child restraint on the rear behind its position. seat, consult your INFINITI retailer for First, adjust the seat back so that it is upright. details. Then secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt or the LATCH system (outboard positions), as applicable. Remove the head restraint from the seat back. Store it in a secure place. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seat back and secure it to the tether anchor bracket that

1-42

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION ON FRONT ț PASSENGER SEAT INFINITI recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rear most position. ț A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat. ț The three-point belt in your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. SIR0101 ț Failure to use the retractor’s locking mode will result in the child WARNING inflate with great force. A rear fac- restraint not being properly se- ing child restraint could be struck cured. The child restraint could tip ț Never install a rear facing child re- by the air bag in a crash and could over or otherwise be unsecured straint in the front passenger seat. seriously injure or kill your child. and cause injury to the child in a Supplemental front air bags sudden stop or collision.

1-43

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

If you must install a child restraint in the front instructions. Child restraints for in- sure to follow the child restraint manufac- seat, follow these steps: fants must be used in the rear facing turer’s instructions for belt routing. direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

SIR0103 SIR0053A

1. Position the child restraint on the front 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the SIR0055 passenger seat. It should be placed in belt is fully extended. At this time, the belt a front facing direction only. Move the 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the retractor is in the automatic locking mode seat to the rear most position. Always child restraint and insert it into the buckle (child restraint mode). It reverts back to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be

1-44

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

emergency locking mode when the belt is out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any fully retracted. more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact. SIR0063

5. Before placing the child in the child SIR0056 restraint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to 4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt make sure that it is securely held in place. to remove any slack in the belt. It should not move more than 1 inch. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt

1-45

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ 2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument panel ...... 2-2 Xenon headlights...... 2-20 Meters and gauges...... 2-3 Headlight switch...... 2-21 Speedometer and odometer...... 2-4 Turn signal switch...... 2-25 Tachometer ...... 2-4 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 2-25 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-5 Horn...... 2-26 Fuel gauge...... 2-5 Heated seats (if so equipped) ...... 2-26 Compass...... 2-6 Climate controlled seat (if so equipped)... 2-27 Warning/indicator lights and audible Active damper suspension mode select reminders ...... 2-9 switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-28 Checking bulbs...... 2-9 Auto mode ...... 2-28 Warning lights...... 2-9 Sport mode ...... 2-29 Indicator lights ...... 2-13 Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch ...... 2-29 Audible reminders...... 2-16 Clock...... 2-30 Security systems ...... 2-16 Adjusting the time...... 2-30 Vehicle security system ...... 2-16 Power outlet ...... 2-30 Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System ..... 2-17 Cigarette lighters and ashtrays...... 2-31 Windshield wiper and washer switch...... 2-19 Storage ...... 2-32 Switch operation ...... 2-19 Cup holders...... 2-32 Rear window and outside mirror (if so Glove box ...... 2-33 equipped) defroster switch...... 2-20 Console box ...... 2-33 Headlight and turn signal switch ...... 2-20 Cargo net...... 2-34

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ Windows...... 2-34 Trunk light ...... 2-42 Power windows...... 2-34 HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver...... 2-43 Sunroof (if so equipped) ...... 2-37 Programming HomeLinkா...... 2-44 Electric sunroof ...... 2-37 Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian Rear control cancel switch (if so customers...... 2-45 equipped)...... 2-38 Operating the HomeLinkா Universal Rear sun shade (if so equipped)...... 2-38 Rear door window sun shade (if so Transceiver ...... 2-46 equipped) ...... 2-40 Programming trouble diagnosis...... 2-46 Interior lights ...... 2-40 Clearing the programmed Personal lights...... 2-41 information...... 2-46 Front ...... 2-41 Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா Rear...... 2-42 button ...... 2-46 Vanity mirror lights...... 2-42 If your vehicle is stolen...... 2-47

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-18) 2. Headlight/turn signal switch (P.2-18) 3. Audio control sub switch (P.4-33) 4. Meters and gauges (P.2-3) 5. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-7) 6. Cruise control main/set switch (P.5-16) Intelligent cruise control switch (P.5-18) 7. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-17) 8. Ignition switch (P.5-7) 9. Security indicator light (P.2-16) 10. Center ventilator (P.4-11) 11. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-22) 12. Display, Climate and Audio control switches/buttons (P.4-3)/Navigation system* 13. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-7) 14. Instrument brightness control (P.2-20) 15. Headlight aiming control switch (P.2-19) 16. Vehicle dynamic control OFF switch (P.2-25) 17. Hood release handle (P.3-12) 18. Active damper suspension mode selector (P.2-24) 19. Tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch (P.3-16) 20. Fuse box cover (P.8-21) 21. Parking brake pedal/parking brake release pedal (P.5-15) 22. CD changer (P.4-17) 23. Cigarette lighter and ashtray (P.2-27) 24. Automatic transmission selector lever (P.5-10) 25. Front heated seat switch (P.2-23) SII0392 26. Clock (P.2-25)

2-2

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

27. Cassette deck (P.4-28) METERS AND GAUGES 28. Glove box (P.2-29) See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details. *: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. (if so equipped)

SII0384

1. Speedometer 6. Warming/indicator lights 2. Odometer/twin trip odometer 7. Intelligent cruise control system display 3. Tachometer 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge 5. Fuel gauge

2-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOM- The twin trip odometer records the distance of TACHOMETER ETER individual trips.

SII0327 SII0325 SII0326 The tachometer indicates engine speed in Speedometer Changing the display: revolutions per minute (r/min). The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Pushing the reset knob changes the display as follows: CAUTION Odometer/twin trip odometer TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A The odometer/twin trip odometer are dis- When engine speed approaches the Resetting the trip odometer: played when the ignition key is in the ON red zone, shift to a higher gear. Op- position. Pushing the reset knob for more than 1 erating the engine in the red zone second resets the trip odometer to zero. may cause serious engine damage. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

2-4

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA- TURE GAUGE CAUTION The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. SII0405 See the “In case of emergency” section for immediate action required. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. FUEL GAUGE SII0328 Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level The engine coolant temperature will vary with isters Empty. in the tank. the outside air temperature and driving con- The indicator light comes on when the fuel ditions. tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches “E”. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches “E”.

2-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

The indicates that the fuel filler lid is COMPASS less than 5 mph (8 km/h). You can also located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be CAUTION calibrated once it has tracked 3 complete circles. ț If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off. If the lamp remains on af- SII0399 ter a few driving trips, have the ve- When the COMP switch is in the ON position, hicle inspected by an INFINITI re- the compass display will indicate the heading tailer. direction the vehicle is heading. ț For additional information, see N: north “Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” later in this section. E: east S: south W: west If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at

2-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass read- ings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens: 1. Press the COMP switch for more than 3 seconds. The current zone number will appear in the display. 2. Find your current location and variance number on the zone map. 3. Press the COMP switch until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the switch in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. Inaccurate compass direction: SII0114 1. With the display turned on, push the

2-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

COMP switch for 3 seconds, until the zone selection comes up (a number will be CAUTION displayed in the mirror compass window). 2. Toggle until correct zone is found and ț Do not install a ski rack, antenna, release switch. etc. which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They 3. The display will show all segments, and affect the operation of the com- return to the normal compass mode within pass. 10 seconds of no switch activity. ț When cleaning the mirror, use a 4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1 paper towel or similar material thru 3. See map. dampened with glass cleaner. Do ț If the compass deviates from the correct not spray glass cleaner directly indication soon after repeated adjustment, on the mirror as it may cause the have the compass checked at an autho- liquid cleaner to enter the mirror rized dealer. housing. ț The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabi- lized.)

2-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Anti-lock brake warning or light Low tire pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light

Automatic transmission check warning Seat belt warning light High beam indicator light (Blue) light

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

Automatic transmission position indica- Charge warning light tor light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Sport mode indicator light (if so (Green) equipped) Intelligent cruise control system Engine oil pressure warning light ON/OFF switch indicator light (White; if Turn signal/hazard indicator lights so equipped) Low fuel warning light Intelligent cruise control system warning Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (Orange; if so equipped) light

CHECKING BULBS The following lights come on briefly and then WARNING LIGHTS go off: Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition or Anti-lock brake key to ON without starting the engine. The , or , , , warning light following lights will come on: , If the light comes on while the engine is , or , , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a running, it may indicate the anti-lock brake burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the system is not functioning properly. Have the electrical system. Have the system checked by system checked by your INFINITI retailer. your INFINITI retailer.

2-9

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the the light comes on when the parking brake is anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary applied. light is on. Driving could be dan- brakes will continue to operate normally. gerous. If you judge it to be safe, Low brake fluid warning light: drive carefully to the nearest ser- If the light comes on while you are driv- When the ignition key is in the ON position, vice station for repairs. Other- ing, contact your INFINITI retailer for re- the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the wise, have your vehicle towed. pair. light comes on while the engine is running ț Pressing the brake pedal with the Automatic transmission with the parking brake not applied, stop the engine stopped and/or low brake check warning light vehicle and perform the following: fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking When the ignition switch is turned ON, the 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid will require greater pedal effort light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “8. as well as pedal travel. blinks for approximately eight seconds, it may Do-it-yourself” section. indicate the transmission is not functioning ț If the brake fluid level is below properly. Have your INFINITI retailer check 2. If the brake fluid level is correct: the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the and repair the transmission. Have the warning system checked by an brake fluid reservoir, do not drive or Brake warning INFINITI retailer. until the brake system has been light checked at an INFINITI retailer. This light functions for both the parking brake WARNING and the foot brake systems. Charge warning light ț Your brake system may not be If the light comes on while the engine is Parking brake indicator: working properly if the warning running, it may indicate the charging system When the ignition key is in the ON position,

2-10

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS is not functioning properly. Turn the engine the engine immediately and call an INFINITI maining in the tank when the fuel gauge off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is retailer or other authorized repair shop. needle reaches E. loose, broken, missing or if the light remains The oil pressure warning light is not de- on, see your INFINITI retailer immediately. Low tire pressure warning signed to indicate a low oil level. Use light the dipstick to check the oil level. See The light comes on for about 1 second when CAUTION “Engine oil” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section. the key switch is turned ON, and then it turns off. Do not continue driving if the belt is CAUTION loose, broken or missing. See “If This light warns of a flat tire. your vehicle overheats” in the “6. In Running the engine with the oil pres- Flat tire warning: case of emergency” section. sure warning light on could cause se- If the vehicle is being driven with a flat tire or rious damage to the engine almost extremely low tire pressure, the light will Door open warning light immediately. Turn off the engine as illuminate. Also a chime will sound for about soon as it is safe to do so. 10 seconds if a tire is flat. This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is For additional information, see “Low tire ON. Low fuel warning light pressure warning system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section and “Flat tire” in the “6. This light comes on when the fuel in the tank Engine oil pressure warn- In case of emergency” section. Also, you can is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is ing light check the pressure of all 4 tires on the monitor convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If display. See “Vehicle information” in the “4. reaches E. the light flickers or comes on during normal Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop There will be a small reserve of fuel re- control systems” section.

2-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

driving after adjusting the tire tire pressure warning system will WARNING pressure, a tire may be flat. If you not function. Contact your have a flat tire, replace it with a INFINITI retailer as soon as pos- ț If the light does not come on with spare tire as soon as possible. sible for tire replacement and/or the key switch turned ON, have the ț system resetting. vehicle checked by an INFINITI re- If your vehicle is equipped with tailer as soon as possible. run-flat tires, you can continue driving after you have a flat tire. ț CAUTION If the light comes on while driv- However, remember that vehicle ing, avoid sudden steering ma- handling stability is reduced, ț The low tire pressure warning is neuvers or abrupt braking, reduce which could lead to an accident not a substitute for the regular tire vehicle speed, pull off the road to and personal injury. See “Wheels pressure check. Be sure to check a safe location and stop the ve- and tires” in the “8. Do-it- the tire pressure regularly. hicle as soon as possible. Seri- yourself” section for more details ț ous vehicle damage could occur and make sure to observe the If the vehicle is being driven at and may lead to an accident and cautions about run-flat tires. Fail- speeds of less than 20 MPH (32 could result in serious personal ure to do so may result in a km/h), the low tire pressure warn- injury. Check the tire pressure for serious accident. ing system may not operate cor- all four wheels and adjust the rectly. ț When a spare tire is mounted or a pressure to the COLD tire pres- ț Be sure to install the specified sure shown on the tire placard. If wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated and the low size of tires to the four wheels the light still comes on while correctly.

2-12

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Seat belt warning light and air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt chime are operational. WARNING The light and chime remind you to fasten seat If any of the following conditions occur, the belts. The light illuminates whenever the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side If the supplemental air bag warning ignition key is turned to ON, and will remain air bag, supplemental curtain side-impact air light is on, it could mean that the illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is bag and pre-tensioner seat belt needs servic- supplemental air bag, supplemental fastened. At the same time, the chime will ing and your INFINITI must be taken to your side air bag, curtain side-impact air sound for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s nearest INFINITI retailer. bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt is securely fastened. seat belt will not operate in an acci- ț The supplemental air bag warning light dent. See “Seat belts” in the “1. Seats, restraints remains on after approximately 7 seconds. and supplemental air bag systems” section for ț The supplemental air bag warning light INDICATOR LIGHTS precautions on seat belt usage. flashes intermittently. Automatic transmission Supplemental air bag ț The supplemental air bag warning light position indicator light warning light does not come on at all. When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the indicator shows the automatic After turning the ignition key to the ON Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemen- selector shift position. See “Driving with position, the supplemental air bag warning tal Restraint Systems and/or the pre-tensioner automatic transmission”, in the “5. Starting light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag seat belt may not function properly. warning light will turn off after about 7 and driving” section. seconds if the supplemental front air bag and For additional information, see “Supplemental supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact restraint system” in the “1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems” section.

2-13

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Cruise main switch indi- Cruise set switch indica- come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or cator light (Green) tor light missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is The light comes on when the cruise control The light comes on while the vehicle speed is installed and closed tightly, and that the main switch is pushed. The light goes out controlled by the cruise control system. If the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) of when the main switch is pushed again. While light flickers while the engine is running, it fuel in the fuel tank. the cruise main switch indicator light comes may indicate the cruise control system is not on, the cruise control system is operational. functioning properly. Have the system After a few driving trips, the lamp Intelligent cruise control checked by your INFINITI retailer. should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. system ON/OFF switch High beam indicator light indicator light (White; if (Blue) Operation so equipped) This light comes on when the headlight high The malfunction indicator lamp will come on The light comes on when the Intelligent Cruise beam is on and goes out when the low beam in one of two ways: Control ON/OFF switch is pushed. The light is selected. goes out when the ON/OFF switch is pushed ț Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — again. While the ON/OFF switch indicator light Malfunction indicator An emission control system malfunction comes on, the system is operational. lamp (MIL) has been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is loose or If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on Intelligent cruise control missing, tighten or install the cap and steady or blinks while the engine is running, system warning light (Or- continue to drive the vehicle. The it may indicate a potential emission control ange; if so equipped) lamp should turn off after a few malfunction. The light comes on if there is a malfunction in driving trips. If the lamp does not the Intelligent Cruise Control system. The malfunction indicator lamp may also turn off after a few driving trips, have the

2-14

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

vehicle inspected by an INFINITI retailer. suspension mode select switch is set to the You do not need to have your vehicle CAUTION SPORT position. towed to the dealer. Turn signal/hazard indica- ț Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — An Continued vehicle operation without tor lights engine misfire has been detected which having the emission control system The light flashes when the turn signal switch may damage the emission control system. checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, re- lever or hazard switch is turned on. To reduce or avoid emission control sys- duced fuel economy, and possible Vehicle dynamic control tem damage: damage to the emission control off indicator light a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH system. The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic (72 km/h). control off switch is pushed to OFF. This b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. Slip indicator light indicates the vehicle dynamic control system c) Avoid steep uphill grades. This indicator will blink when the VDC system and traction control system are not operating. d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo or the traction control system is operating, When the vehicle dynamic control off indicator being hauled or towed. thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road light and slip indicator light come on with the The malfunction indicator lamp may stop surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing vehicle dynamic control system turned on, blinking and come on steady. its traction limits. this light alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle dynamic control system’s fail-safe Have the vehicle inspected by an autho- Sport mode indicator light mode is operating, i.e. the vehicle dynamic rized INFINITI retailer. You do not need to (if so equipped) control system may not be functioning prop- have your vehicle towed to the retailer. This light comes on when the active damper erly. Have the system checked by your INFINITI retailer. If an abnormality occurs in

2-15

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS the system, the vehicle dynamic control sys- Brake pad wear warning Security indicator light tem function will be canceled but the vehicle The disc brake pads have audible wear warn- is still driveable. For additional information, ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, see “Vehicle dynamic control system (VDC)” it will make a high pitched scraping sound in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this when the vehicle is in motion whether or not manual. the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes AUDIBLE REMINDERS checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. Key reminder chime A chime will sound if the driver side door is SECURITY SYSTEMS opened while the key is left in the ignition Your vehicle has two types of security sys- SII0330 switch (ignition switch is turned off). Remove tems, as follows: How to activate the vehicle se- the key and take it with you when leaving the ț Vehicle security curity system vehicle. ț Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System 1. Close all windows. Light reminder chime The security condition will be shown by the The system can be activated even if the A chime will sound when the driver side door security indicator light. windows are open. is opened if the light switch is in the or position (ignition switch is turned off). VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Turn the light switch off when you leave the The vehicle security system provides visual 3. Close and lock all doors, hood and trunk vehicle. and audio alarm signals to deter theft of the lid. The doors can be locked either with a vehicle. key, key fob or door lock knob.

2-16

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

4. Confirm that the security indicator light ț the headlights blink and the horn sounds scribed above, have it checked by your comes on. The security indicator light intermittently. INFINITI dealer. glows for about 30 seconds and then ț the alarm automatically turns off after 50 INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBI- blinks. The system is now activated. If, seconds; however, the alarm will reactivate LIZER SYSTEM during this 30 second time period, the door if the vehicle is tampered with again. or trunk lid is unlocked by the key or the The Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System will key fob, or the ignition key is turned to The alarm is activated by: not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Infiniti electronic ignition key. ACC or ON, the system will not activate. ț Unlocking the door or opening the trunk However, when the trunk lid is closed after lid without using the key or electronic The engine may not start with the registered being unlocked with a key or key fob, the ignition key. (Even if the door is opened by electronic ignition key under the following system returns to the armed phase. releasing the door inside lock knob or the conditions: ț Even when the driver and/or passen- trunk lid is opened by operating the trunk gers are in the vehicle, the system lid release switch, the alarm is activated.) will activate with all doors, hood, and ț Opening the hood. trunk lid locked and ignition key off. When turning the ignition to ACC, the How to stop alarm system will be released. The alarm will stop by unlocking a door with Vehicle security system opera- the key or by pushing the unlock button on the tion electronic ignition key. The alarm will not stop The warning system will give the following if the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON. alarm: If the system does not operate as de-

2-17

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry tion for approximately 5 seconds. Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 5 (1) This device may not cause harmful seconds. interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- 3. Repeat step 1 and 2. cluding interference that may cause un- 4. Restart the engine while holding the device desired operation of the device. SIP0281B (which may have caused the interference) CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX- separate from the registered electronic ࠗ1 If metal contacts the electronic ignition PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANU- ignition key. key. FACTURE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OP- ࠗ2 If a device equipped with a transponder recommends placing the registered electronic ERATE THE EQUIPMENT. contacts the electronic ignition key. ignition key on a separate key ring to avoid If the engine fails to start using the registered interference from other devices. electronic ignition key (for example, when Statement related to section 15 of FCC interference is caused by another electronic rules for Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer ignition key, an automated toll road device or System automated payment device on the key ring), (CONT ASSY - IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY restart the engine using the following proce- - IMMOBILIZER) dures: This device complies with part 15 of the

2-18

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Security indicator light If the light still remains on and/or the en- when the ignition key is in the ON position. gine will not start, see your INFINITI re- Push the lever down to operate the wiper. Pull tailer for Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer the lever toward you to operate the washer. System service as soon as possible. Please bring all electronic ignition keys The intermittent operation speed is as follows: that you have when visiting your ț When the vehicle speed is continuously INFINITI retailer for service. low, so is the intermittent operation speed. WINDSHIELD WIPER AND ț When the vehicle speed is continuously WASHER SWITCH high, so is the intermittent operation SII0330 speed. This light blinks whenever the ignition key is Low: Continuous low speed operation removed for 5 seconds after the ignition High: Continuous high speed operation switch is OFF. This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. WARNING

If a non-registered key is in the ignition In freezing temperatures the washer switch, the indicator light comes on. solution may freeze on the wind- SII0331A If the Infiniti Vehicle immobilizer System is shield and obscure your vision which malfunctioning, this light will remain on while SWITCH OPERATION may lead to an accident. Warm wind- the ignition switch is in the ON position. The windshield wiper and washer operates

2-19

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

REAR WINDOW AND OUT- tion” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio and shield with the defroster before you voice-activated control systems” section. wash the windshield. SIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH CAUTION CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the The following could damage the rear window, be careful not to scratch washer system: or damage the rear window de- ț Do not operate the washer con- froster. tinuously for more than 30 seconds. HEADLIGHT AND TURN ț Do not operate the washer if the SIGNAL SWITCH reservoir tank is empty. SII0216B XENON HEADLIGHTS To defog/defrost the rear window glass and the outside mirrors, start the engine and push WARNING the switch on. (The indicator light will come on.) Push the switch again to turn the de- HIGH VOLTAGE froster off. ț When xenon headlights are on, The automatic turn off time can be adjusted. they produce a high voltage. To For more information, see “Vehicle informa-

2-20

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

ț The life of xenon headlights will be HEADLIGHT SWITCH prevent an electric shock, never shortened by frequent on-off opera- attempt to modify or disas- tion. It is generally desirable not to Lighting semble. Always have your xenon turn off the headlights for short inter- headlights replaced at an vals, (for example, when the vehicle INFINITI retailer. stops at a traffic signal). Even when ț Xenon headlights provide consid- the daytime running lights are active erably more light than conven- (Canada only), the xenon headlights tional headlights. If they are not do not turn on. This way the life of the correctly aimed, they might tem- xenon headlights is not reduced. porarily blind an oncoming driver ț If the xenon headlight bulb is close to or the driver ahead of you and burning out, the brightness will dras- SII0406 cause a serious accident. If head- tically decrease, the light will start lights are not aimed correctly, blinking, or the color of the light will Turn the switch to the AUTO position: immediately take your vehicle to become reddish. If one or more of the When the ignition key is in the ON position, an INFINITI retailer and have the above signs appear, contact an the tail light, headlight, instrument lights and headlights adjusted correctly. INFINITI retailer. other lights turn on automatically, depending on the brightness of the surroundings. When When the xenon headlight is initially turned the ignition key is turned to the OFF or LOCK on, its brightness or color varies slightly. position with the light switch in the AUTO However, the color and brightness will soon position, the automatic turn off timer will stabilize. activate. See information later in this section

2-21

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS for automatic headlights off delay. Headlight aiming control When traveling with no heavy load or on a flat road, select position 0. When the light switch is turned to the position, the headlight low or high beam will turn off. WARNING When turning the switch to the posi- Xenon headlights are extremely tion, the parking, side marker, tail, license bright compared to conventional plate and instrument lights will come on. headlights. If the xenon headlights When turning the switch to the posi- hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle tion, the headlights will come on and all the ahead or the windshield of the on- other lights remain on. SII0224 coming vehicle, the driver of these Depending on the number of occupants in the vehicles may have difficulty driving vehicle and the load it is carrying, the head- because of the brightness. Use the light axis may be higher than desired. If the headlight aiming control switch to vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, the lower the light axis. See “Headlight headlights may directly hit the rearview mirror and turn signal switch” earlier in this section for information on xenon of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the headlights. oncoming vehicle. The light axis can be lowered with the operation of the switch. The larger the number designated on the switch, the lower the axis.

2-22

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument brightness control Headlight beam select with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights

SII0042 SII0407 illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on The instrument brightness control operates To select the high beam, push the lever until the ignition switch is turned off. when the light switch is in the AUTO (ignition forward. Pull it back to select the low beam. key is in the ON), or position. Flashing headlight WARNING Turn the control to adjust the brightness of Pulling the lever toward you will flash the instrument panel lights. headlight high beam. When the daytime running light sys- When the control is turned in the maximum tem is active, tail lights on your ve- Daytime running light system brightening direction, the light intensity will hicle are not on. It is necessary at (Canada only) be at maximum. When the control is turned in dusk to turn on your headlights. Fail- ure to do so could cause an the maximum darkening direction, the light The headlights automatically illuminate at a will be turned off. reduced intensity when the engine is started

2-23

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

photo sensor controls the autolight; if it accident injuring yourself and oth- is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if CAUTION ers. it is dark and the headlights will illuminate. ț Automatic headlights off delay When you turn on the headlight Battery saver system switch again after the lights auto- For automatic headlights off delay setting, see matically turns off, the lights will ț When the headlight switch is in the “Automatic headlights off delay” in the “4. not turn off automatically. Be sure or position while the ignition Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated to turn the light switch to the OFF key is in the ON position, the lights will control systems” section. position when you leave the ve- automatically turn off 45 seconds after the hicle for extended periods of time, ignition switch has been turned to the OFF otherwise the battery will go dead. position. However, the lights will turn off if the driver’s or front passenger’s door is ț Never leave the light switch on opened in this condition. when the engine is not running for extended periods of time. ț When the headlight switch remains in the or position after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to SII0082A the ON position from the OFF position. Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor located on the top left- hand side of the instrument panel. The

2-24

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH HAZARD WARNING ț Do not use the hazard warning Turn signal FLASHER SWITCH flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. ț Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

SII0408 SII0335 The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on. Move the lever up or down to signal the Push the switch on to warn other drivers when turning direction. When the turn is completed, you must stop or park under emergency con- Some state laws may prohibit the use of the turn signals cancel automatically. ditions. All turn signal lights will flash. the hazard warning flasher switch while driving. Lane change signal WARNING To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin ț If stopping for an emergency, be flashing. sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

2-25

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

HORN 2. Push the low or high position of the tem may result in serious per- switch, as desired, depending on the tem- sonal injury. perature. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate. HEATED SEATS (if so The heater is controlled by a thermostat, equipped) automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave SII0175 the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel. CAUTION

WARNING ț Do not use the seat heater for ex- SII0336 tended periods or when no one is ț Do not disassemble the horn. Do- The front seats or rear seats (if so equipped) using the seat. ing so could affect proper opera- are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches ț Do not put anything on the seat tion of the supplemental front air are located on the center console and on the which insulates heat, such as a bag system. Tampering with the inside of the rear door. blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. supplemental front air bag sys- 1. Start the engine. Otherwise, the seat may become

2-26

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLLED amount of the air or its temperature ac- overheated. SEAT (if so equipped) cording to the selected temperature. ț Do not place anything hard or 3. Adjust the desired temperature using the heavy on the seat or pierce it with temperature control dial. a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. HEAT position: 1 (Normal) ϳ 4 (Warm) COOL position: 1 (Normal) ϳ 4 (Cool) ț Any liquid spilled on the heating seat should be removed immedi- When cool position 1 is selected, cooling ately with a dry cloth. does not operate, air at room temperature ț When cleaning the seat, never will be provided. use benzine, thinner, or any simi- SII0393 The climate controlled seat blower remains lar materials. on low speed for approximately 60 sec- The climate controlled seat warms and cools ț If any abnormalities are found or onds after turning the switch on or select- down the front seats by blowing warm or cool ing the desired temperature. the heating seat does not oper- air from the surface of the seat. The switches ate, turn the switch off and have located by the seats can be operated indepen- 4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or the system checked by your dently of each other. cooled, and/or before you leave the ve- INFINITI retailer. hicle, be sure to turn the switch to the OFF 1. Start the engine. ț The battery could run down if the position (center). 2. Select HEAT or COOL by pressing either heater is operated while the en- To check the air filter for the climate side of the switch. gine is not running. controlled seat, contact your INFINITI re- The climate controlled seat controls the tailer.

2-27

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

ACTIVE DAMPER SUSPEN- CAUTION ț Any liquid spilled on the seat should be removed immediately SION MODE SELECT SWITCH (if so equipped) ț The battery could run down if the with a dry cloth. climate controlled seat is oper- The climate controlled seat has ated while the engine is not run- an air filter. Do not operate cli- ning. mate controlled seat without an ț Do not use the climate controlled air filter. This may result in dam- seat for extended periods or when age to the system. no one is using the seat. ț When cleaning the seat, never ț Do not put anything on the seat use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials. which insulates heat, such as a SII0337 blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. ț If any abnormalities are found or Otherwise, the seat may become the climate controlled seat does The active damper suspension controls damp- overheated. not operate, turn the switch off ing force and helps minimize the movement of and have the system checked by ț Do not place anything hard or the vehicle body. It helps stable driving when your INFINITI retailer. heavy on the seat or pierce it with the vehicle moves up and down on large a pin or similar object. This may rolling roads or when the vehicle body leans result in damage to the climate during cornering with a high centrifugal force. controlled seat. The damping force of the shock absorbers can be adjusted to the level you desire. Set the

2-28

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS switch to the position you desire while the VEHICLE DYNAMIC CON- To cancel the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys- ignition switch is ON. TROL OFF SWITCH tem (VDC), push the VDC OFF switch to turn off the system. The indicator will come AUTO MODE on. Set the switch to the AUTO position for normal Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the driving. The damping force will automatically engine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle adjust according to the road surface and dynamic control system (VDC)” in the “5. driving conditions. Starting and driving” section. SPORT MODE Set the switch to the SPORT position when you desire a firm feeling all the time. SII0338

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System ON for most driving conditions. When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

2-29

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

CLOCK POWER OUTLET adapters or more than one electrical accessory. ț Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.) ț Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defogger is on. SII0220 SII0387 ț This power outlet is not designed If the power supply is disconnected, the for use with a cigarette lighter clock will not indicate the correct time. unit. Readjust the time. CAUTION ț Push the plug in as far as it will ț ADJUSTING THE TIME Use caution as the socket and plug go. If good contact is not made, To adjust the time, turn the adjusting knob. may be hot during or immediately the plug may overheat or the in- after use. ternal temperature fuse may ț Do not use with accessories that blow. exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) ț Before inserting or disconnecting power draw. Do not use double a plug, be sure to turn off the

2-30

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

tion switch is in the ACC or ON position. power switch of the electrical accessory being used or the ACC Push the lighter in all the way, then release it. WARNING power of the vehicle. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after The cigarette lighter should not be ț When not in use, be sure to close use. used while driving so full attention the cap. Do not allow water to may be given to vehicle operation. contact the outlet. To empty the ashtray, pull up on the horizon- tal bar and remove the tray. CAUTION CIGARETTE LIGHTERS AND ASHTRAYS The cigarette lighter socket is a power source for the cigarette lighter element only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other accessory is not recommended.

SII0342

SII0341

The cigarette lighter operates when the igni-

2-31

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

STORAGE To close, lower the cup holder lid and push down lightly. CUP HOLDERS Use the cup holder properly and according to the size of the cups. The front cup holder inner cases can be removed for cleaning.

SII0092A WARNING

The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

ț Avoid abrupt starting and braking SII0354 when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the SII0343A To open, push the cup holder opener switch. liquid is hot, it can scald you or

2-32

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

CONSOLE BOX your passenger. WARNING ț Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure Keep the glove box lid closed while you in an accident. driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. GLOVE BOX

SII0358

SII0344 Upper part: ț Push the button on the side of the lid to When locking or unlocking the glove box, use open the upper part sideways. the emergency key or wallet key. ț The lid can be opened from the driver and The glove box may be opened by pulling the front passenger seats. handle when unlocked.

2-33

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

ț The front part is designed to be used as a ț coin case. Keep the center console box lid closed while driving to prevent CAUTION To open the lid, the right and left sides it must injury in an accident or a sudden be closed securely. stop. Avoid keeping heavy objects in the net. Lower part: While pushing up the button, open the cover. CARGO NET WINDOWS Bottom case: POWER WINDOWS Push the button on the front of the bottom case to open the lids. WARNING To close the lids, manually push the lids ț Make sure that all passengers sideway. have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and WARNING before closing the windows. Use SII0394 the window lock switch to prevent ț The center console box should not The cargo net helps keep packages in the unexpected use of the power win- be used while driving so full atten- cargo area from moving around while your dows. tion may be given to vehicle vehicle is driven. ț Do not leave children unattended operation. To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to inside the vehicle. They could the retainers.

2-34

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in the vehicle. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the ON position, or for about 45 SII0345 SII0346 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the driver’s or front passen- To open or close the window, push down or The passenger side switch will open or close ger’s door is opened during this period of pull up the switch and hold it. The main only the corresponding window. To open or about 45 seconds, power to the windows is switch (driver side switches) will open or close the window, hold the switch down or up. cancelled. close all the windows. Locking passenger’s windows When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

2-35

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Automatic operation (For all the window as it is closing, the window will be door windows) immediately lowered. The auto reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position.

SII0348 Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function To fully open or close the window, completely may be activated if an impact or load SII0347 push down or pull up the switch and release similar to something being caught in the it; it need not be held. The window will window occurs. automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just turn the switch toward WARNING the opposite side. A light press or pull on the switch will cause There are some small distances im- the window to open or close until the switch mediately before the closed position is released. which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, Auto reverse function etc., inside the vehicle before clos- If the control unit detects something caught in

2-36

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Sliding the sunroof ing the window. sand from the sunroof before opening. SUNROOF (if so equipped) ț Do not place heavy objects on the sunroof or surrounding area. WARNING ELECTRIC SUNROOF ț In an accident you could be thrown The sunroof operates when the ignition key is from the vehicle through an open in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds sunroof. Always use seat belts and after the ignition key is turned to the OFF SII0349 child restraints. position. If the driver’s, or passenger’s door is To open the roof, press and hold the switch to ț Do not allow anyone to stand up opened during this period of about 45 sec- the open side. or extend any portion of their onds, power to the sunroof is canceled. body out of the opening while the To close the roof, press and hold the switch to vehicle is in motion or while the the closed side. sunroof is closing. Automatic operation: CAUTION To fully open the sunroof, completely press the switch to the open side; it need not be held. The sunroof will automatically open all ț Remove water drops, snow, ice or the way. To stop the sunroof, just press the switch toward the close side, or press the up

2-37

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS or down side of the tilt switch. down the sunroof, press and hold the down REAR CONTROL CANCEL side. SWITCH (if so equipped) Auto reverse function (When closing the sunroof) Sun shade If the control unit detects something caught in Open/close the sun shade by sliding it the sunroof as it is closing, the sunroof will backward/forward. immediately open backward. The shade will open automatically when the The auto reverse function can be activated sunroof is opened. However, it must be when the sunroof is closed by automatic closed manually. operation when the ignition key is in the ON If the sunroof does not close position or for 45 seconds after the ignition Have your INFINITI retailer check and repair SII0391 key is turned to the OFF position. the sunroof. Turning the rear control cancel switch to Depending on the environment or driv- cancel side will inactivate the following ing conditions, the auto reverse function switches in the rear center armrest. may be activated if an impact or load ț similar to something being caught in the Air conditioner sunroof occurs. ț Audio Tilting the sunroof ț Rear sun shade To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press and hold the up side of the tilt switch. To tilt

2-38

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

REAR SUN SHADE (if so The rear sun shade operates when the ignition equipped) key is in the ACC or ON position. The rear sun shade switches are located on CAUTION the front overhead console and the rear armrest. ț To avoid personal injury, keep To raise the screen, push the upper side of the your hands, fingers and head switch. away from the sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet port. To lower the screen, push the lower side of the switch. ț Do not allow children near the rear sun shade system. They The switch need not be held down. could be injured. ț Do not place objects on or near CAUTION the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or ț Do not place objects (such as damage it. newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen inlet port. Doing so ț Do not pull or push the rear sun may entangle these objects in the shade. This could cause improper screen when it is extending or re- operation or damage it. tracting, causing improper operation or damage to the screen. SII0356

2-39

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

REAR DOOR WINDOW SUN ț Do not push the sun shade arm SHADE (if so equipped) with your hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result. ț Do not put any object into the screen inlet port as this may result in improper operation or damage the screen. ț Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result in improper SII0360 operation or damage the screen. ț Do not forcefully pull the screen. The rear door window sun shades are built in Doing so may elongate the the door sash. screen. Improper operation or To use the shade, pull it out and hook on the damage to the screen may result. opposite side sash.

To fold the shade, release the hooks gently. SII0351

INTERIOR LIGHTS While the switch is in the center ț position, The interior light has a three-position switch. the front and rear personal lights will illuminate under the following conditions:

2-40

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

ț driver’s door is unlocked. The lights remaining on time can be adjusted PERSONAL LIGHTS see “Vehicle information” in the “4. Monitor, — remain on for a maximum of 30 climate, audio and voice-activated control FRONT seconds. systems” section. ț driver’s door is opened. — remain on for a maximum of 30 CAUTION seconds after driver’s door is closed. Leaving the light switch in the ON po- ț ignition key is removed from key cylinder. sition for extended periods of time — remain on for a maximum of 30 will result in a discharged battery. seconds. SII0352 The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the ACC position, or the driver’s door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after 30 minutes while doors are open. When some doors are opened, the door step light for each open door and some personal lights will come on, and the closed door’s personal lights will darken. See “Personal lights” later in this section.

2-41

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

REAR earlier in this section. VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS ࠗ3 When the switch is pressed, both right and left lights come on.

SII0361 SII0101

The lights will turn on/off depending on what The light on the vanity mirror will turn on side of the switch is pressed: SII0404 when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. ࠗ1 The light stays on when pressed to this Console light TRUNK LIGHT position. The light will turn on when the headlight The light illuminates when the trunk lid is ࠗ2 When the door is opened, both the right switch is turned to the or posi- opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light and left lights come on. They turn off when tion. will go off. the door is closed. If the interior light switch is in OFF position, the personal light will not turn on when the any of the doors are opened. See “Interior lights”

2-42

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

HomeLinkா UNIVERSAL Once the HomeLinkா Universal Trans- rage door opener which cannot TRANSCEIVER ceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming detect an object in the path of a The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver pro- procedures (Example: new vehicle pur- closing garage door and then au- vides a convenient way to consolidate the tomatically stop and reverse, chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the functions of up to three individual hand-held does not meet current federal programmed HomeLinkா Universal transmitters into one built-in device. safety standards. Using a garage Transceiver buttons should be erased door opener without these fea- The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver power for security purposes. For additional in- tures increases the risk of serious will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the formation, refer to “Programming injury or death. ignition switch has been turned to the off HomeLinkா” later in this section. ț position. During programming, your garage door or gate may open or ா HomeLink Universal Transceiver: WARNING close. Make sure that people and ț Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) objects are clear of the garage ț Do not use the HomeLinkா Univer- devices such as garage doors, gates, home door or gate that you are pro- sal Transceiver with any garage and office lighting, entry door locks and gramming. door opener that lacks safety stop ț security systems. and reverse features as required Your vehicle’s engine should be ț Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No by federal safety standards. turned off while programming the HomeLinkா Universal Trans- separate batteries are required. If the vehi- (These standards became effec- ceiver. cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- tive for opener models manufac- nected, HomeLinkா will retain all pro- tured after April 1, 1982). A ga- gramming.

2-43

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

PROGRAMMING HomeLinkா To program your HomeLink Transceiver to operate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, home or office lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device. Note: Garage door openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling code protection”. To program a garage door opener equipped with “rolling code protection”; you will need to use SII0395 SII0396 a ladder to get up to the garage door opener 1. To begin, press and hold the 2 outer 3. Using both hands, simultaneously press motor to be able to access the “smart or learn” HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory) and hold both the HomeLinkா button you program button. until the indicator light blinks slowly (after want to program and the hand-held trans- 20 seconds). Release both buttons. mitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 2. Position the end of the hand-held trans- has been completed. mitter 1-3 inches away from the HomeLinkா surface. 4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly

2-44

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

flashing light indicates successful pro- NOTE: to “clear” all previously programmed HomeLinkா buttons). gramming. To activate the garage door or Once you have pressed and released the other programmed device, press and hold program button on the garage door If you have any questions or are having ா the programmed HomeLink button - re- opener’s motor and the “training light” difficulty programming your HomeLinkா but- leasing when the device begins to activate. is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to tons, please refer to the HomeLinkா web site 5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா perform step 7. Use the help of a second at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-662- blinks rapidly for two seconds and then person for convenience to assist when 6200. performing this step. turns solid, HomeLinkா has picked up a PROGRAMMING HomeLinkா “rolling code” garage door opener signal. 7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing and FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS You will need to proceed with the next releasing the garage door opener program Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required steps to train the HomeLinkா to complete button, firmly press and release the hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting the programming which may require a HomeLinkா button you’ve just pro- after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held ladder and another person for conve- grammed. Press and release the transmitter to HomeLinkா, continue to press nience. HomeLinkா button up to three times to and hold the HomeLinkா button (note steps 2 complete the training. 6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” through 4 under “Programming HomeLinkா ”) program button located on the garage door 8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your opener’s motor to activate the “training programmed. (To program the remaining hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until mode”. This button is usually located near HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating the antenna wire that hangs down from the gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only. successful programming). motor. If the wire originates from under a NOTE: NOTE: light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button. Do not repeat step one unless you want If programming a garage door opener,

2-45

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS etc., it is advised to unplug the device battery area facing away from the to clear all programming, press and hold the during the “cycling” process to prevent HomeLinkா surface. two outside buttons and release when the possible damage to the garage door ț press and hold both the HomeLinkா and indicator light begins to flash (approximately opener components. hand-held transmitter buttons without in- 20 seconds). OPERATING THE HomeLinkா terruption. REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER ț position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 HomeLinkா BUTTON The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Trans- ா programmed) may now be used to activate the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter ceiver button, complete the following. garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the in that position for up to 15 seconds. If ா 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா appropriate programmed HomeLinkா Univer- HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another button. Do not release the button until sal Transceiver button. The red indicator light position - keeping the indicator light in step 4 has been completed. will illuminate while the signal is being view at all times. transmitted. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash If you continue to have programming difficul- slowly (after 20 seconds), position the PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DI- ties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to AGNOSIS Affairs Department. The phone numbers are 127 mm) away from the HomeLinkா sur- If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the located in the Foreword of this Owner’s face. hand-held transmitter information: Manual. 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter ț replace the hand-held transmitter batteries CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED button. with new batteries. INFORMATION 4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, ț position the hand-held transmitter with its Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however first slowly and then rapidly. When the

2-46

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

indicator light begins to flash rapidly, FCC Notice: release both buttons. This device complies with FCC rules part The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button 15. Operation is subject to the following has now been reprogrammed. The new device two conditions: (1) This device may not can be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா cause harmful interference and (2) This button that was just programmed. This pro- device must accept any interference that cedure will not affect any other programmed may be received, including interference HomeLinkா buttons. that may cause undesired operation. IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. If your vehicle is stolen, you should change Changes or modifications not expressly the codes of any non-rolling code device that approved by the party responsible for has been programmed into HomeLinkா. Con- compliance could void the user’s au- sult the Owner’s Manual of each device or call thority to operate the device. the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 When your vehicle is recovered, you will FCC I.D.: CB2V67690 need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Uni- versal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.

2-47

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ ੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 3 PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Keys (Electronic ignition key)...... 3-2 Auto open & close trunk lid (if so Doors ...... 3-3 equipped)...... 3-14 Locking with key (Driver’s door only) ... 3-4 Interior trunk lid release...... 3-16 Opening and closing windows ...... 3-4 Fuel filler lid...... 3-17 Locking with inside lock knob ...... 3-4 Opener operation...... 3-17 Locking with power door lock switch.... 3-5 Fuel filler cap...... 3-17 Child safety rear door lock...... 3-5 Steering wheel ...... 3-19 Remote keyless entry system...... 3-5 Tilt operation...... 3-19 How to use remote keyless entry Telescopic operation ...... 3-19 system...... 3-6 Sun visors...... 3-20 Electronic key ...... 3-10 Using the sun visors...... 3-20 Battery replacement ...... 3-10 Mirrors...... 3-20 Hood ...... 3-11 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror...... 3-20 Trunk lid ...... 3-12 Outside mirrors ...... 3-21 Opener operation...... 3-12 Automatic drive positioner ...... 3-22 Key operation ...... 3-13 Automatic drive positioner Auto closure ...... 3-13 operation ...... 3-22

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

KEYS (Electronic ignition key) When the master electronic ignition key is inserted in the steering lock position, verifi- cation of the transponder ID will start automatically. If the ID code is judged to be correct, the steering lock pin will be released, allowing the key to turn and start the engine. You can only drive your vehicle using the master electronic ignition keys which are registered to the Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer SIP0277A System components in your vehicle. These How to use the emergency key keys have a transponder chip. (The wallet key and emergency key cannot be used to start If the remote control system cannot be used and drive your vehicle.) due to a discharged battery, use the emergency key to lock or unlock the glove box, The emergency key and wallet key can be used doors and trunk lid. for all locks. Removing the key When the key case with the wallet key is ț placed into your wallet, be careful not to Release the lock knob at the rear of the apply excessive force to the wallet as it master electronic ignition key and remove SIP0276A or other cards could be damaged. the emergency key. The master electronic ignition keys have a ț To install the emergency key to the master transponder. electronic ignition key, securely lock the

3-2

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

lock knob and then check that the emer- be registered to the Infiniti Vehicle Immobi- gency key will not move. lizer System components in your vehicle by ing the doors, and will help keep your INFINITI retailer. Bring all Infiniti elec- out intruders. ț The emergency key cannot be used to start tronic ignition keys to your INFINITI retailer ț the engine, but it can be used to release Before opening any door, always for registration. The registration process will look for and avoid oncoming traf- the steering lock. erase all memory of the Infiniti Vehicle Immo- fic. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. bilizer System components so all keys require ț Do not leave children unattended Record the key number on the key number registration. inside the vehicle. They could plate supplied with your keys and keep it in a DOORS unknowingly activate switches or safe place (such as your wallet), not in the controls. Unattended children vehicle. INFINITI does not record any key could become involved in serious number so it is very important to keep track of WARNING accidents. your key number plate. ț A key number is only necessary when you Always have the doors locked have lost all emergency keys and wallet key, while driving. Along with the use and do not have one to duplicate. If you still of seat belts, this provides greater have a key, this key can be duplicated by your safety in the event of an accident INFINITI retailer. by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM This also helps keep children and KEY - Master electronic ignition keys: others from unintentionally open- As many as 4 Infiniti electronic ignition keys can be used with one vehicle. New keys must

3-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

LOCKING WITH KEY (Driver’s the vehicle will lock all doors. The rear door windows will operate 0.5 second after the front windows’ operation. The door only) ț Turning the driver’s door key one time to door windows will open or close while turning the rear of the vehicle will unlock the the driver’s door key. This function will corresponding door. From that position, operate after the ignition switch is off and 45 returning the key to neutral (where the key seconds passed or either the front door is can only be removed and inserted.) and opened. turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors. LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK OPENING AND CLOSING WIN- KNOB DOWS SIP0292 The driver’s door key operation allows you to open and close all door windows simulta- Manual neously. To lock the door, turn the driver’s door key ț To open the windows, turn the driver’s toward the front of the vehicle. door key to the rear of the vehicle for To unlock, turn it toward the rear. longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked. Power SIP0092 ț To close the windows, turn the driver’s The power door lock system allows you to door key to the front of the vehicle for lock or unlock all doors simultaneously. longer than 1 second after the door is ț Turning the driver’s door key to the front of locked.

3-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

To lock the doors from the outside without a CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY key, move the inside lock knob to the lock LOCK SYSTEM position, then close the door. It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, to When locking the door this way, be cer- release the trunk lid and to activate the panic tain not to leave the key inside the ve- alarm by using the electronic ignition key hicle. (electronic key) from outside the vehicle. LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR Before locking the doors, make sure the LOCK SWITCH key is not left in the vehicle. The electronic key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. SIP0005 (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) Child safety locking helps prevent doors from As many as 4 electronic keys can be used with being opened accidentally, especially when one vehicle. For information concerning the small children are in the vehicle. purchase and use of additional electronic When the lever is in the lock position, keys, contact your INFINITI retailer. the rear door can be opened only from SIP0278 the outside. The electronic keys will not function when: Operating the lock-unlock switch will lock or ț the battery is dead, unlock all doors. (driver and front passenger ț the distance between the vehicle and the sides) electronic key is over 33 ft (10 m),

3-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

ț the electronic key is in the ignition switch. In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK authorized use to unlock the vehicle. button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes CAUTION For information regarding the eras- twice. ing procedure, please contact an When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither The following conditions or occur- INFINITI retailer. the hazard indicator nor the horn operates. rences will damage the electronic (Switching procedure) key. HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ț Do not allow the electronic key to ENTRY SYSTEM Push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the become wet. electronic key simultaneously for more than 2 Setting hazard indicator and seconds to switch from one mode to the ț Do not drop the electronic key. horn mode other. ț Do not strike the electronic key This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and When pushing the buttons to set hazard sharply against another object. horn mode when you first receive the vehicle. indicator only mode, the hazard indicator ț Do not place the electronic key for In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the flashes 3 times. an extended period in an area LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator When pushing the buttons to set hazard where temperatures exceed 140°F flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator (60°C). the UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazard flashes once and the horn chirps once. indicator flashes once. If a electronic key is lost or stolen, INFINITI recommends erasing the ID If hazard indicator and horn mode is not code of that electronic key. This will necessary, you can switch to hazard indicator prevent the electronic key from un- only mode by following the switching procedure.

3-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

SIP0289

Locking doors 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. 1. Remove the ignition key. ț When the LOCK button is pushed with all 2. Close all the doors. doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes 3. Push the LOCK button on the electronic twice and the horn chirps once as a key. reminder that the doors are already locked. 4. All the doors will lock.

3-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Unlocking doors 1. Push the UNLOCK button on the electronic key once. ț Only the driver’s door unlocks ț The hazard indicator flashes once. ț The interior light turns on and the light timer activates for 30 seconds when the switch is in the center ࠗ position. 2. Push the UNLOCK button on the electronic key again within 5 seconds. ț All doors unlock ț The hazard indicator flashes once. 5 minutes after pressing the UNLOCK button, all doors will be locked automatically under following conditions. ț When any door is not opened. ț When the ignition key is not set in the SIP0279B ON position.

3-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

The interior light can be turned off without The door windows cannot be closed by 3. The panic alarm stops when: waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition using the electronic key. ț It has run for 30 seconds, or switch to the ON position or by locking the doors with the electronic key. Releasing the trunk lid ț The LOCK or UNLOCK button is 1. Push the trunk button on the electronic key pressed, or Opening windows for longer than 0.5 seconds with the key ț The panic button on the electronic key The electronic key operation allows you to removed from the key cylinder. is pushed for longer than 0.5 seconds. open all door windows simultaneously. 2. The trunk lid opens. ț To open the windows, press the UNLOCK The trunk lid will not open with the trunk button on the electronic key for longer lid release cancel switch turned to OFF. than 3 seconds after the door is un- See “Trunk lid” later in this section for locked. cancel switch. It can be opened only The rear door windows will operate 0.5 with the key. second after the front windows’ operation. The door windows will open while pressing the Using the panic alarm UNLOCK button on the electronic key. This If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- function will operate after the ignition switch ened, you may activate the alarm to call is off and 45 seconds passed or either the attention as follows: front door is opened. 1. Push the panic button on the electronic This opening windows function of the elec- key for longer than 0.5 seconds. tronic key can be suspended. Please contact 2. The vehicle security alarm and headlights an INFINITI retailer. will stay on for 30 seconds.

3-9

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

ELECTRONIC KEY Replace the battery as follows: other than replacement, perform step 5 above. BATTERY REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the emergency key and the screw from the electronic key. ț An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always con- 2. Remove the outer case. firm local regulations for battery dis- 3. Open the inner case using a suitable tool. posal. 4. Replace the battery with a new one. ț The electronic key is water-proof; Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva- however, if it does get wet, immedi- lent ately wipe completely dry. Make sure that the ᮍ side faces the bot- FCC Notice: tom of the case. Changes or modifications not expressly 5. Close the inner case securely. approved by the manufacturer compli- 6. Assemble the outer case. ance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 7. Press the key button two or three times to check its operation. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry See your INFINITI retailer if you need any Canada. assistance for replacement. Operation is subject to the following two SIP0280 If the battery is removed for any reason conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

3-10

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS device must accept any interference re- HOOD ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

SIP0282

1. Pull the hood lock release handle located below the instrument panel; the hood will WARNING then spring up slightly. 2. Pull the lever at the front of the hood with ț Make sure the hood is completely your fingertips and raise the hood. closed and latched before driving. 3. When closing the hood, slowly close the Failure to do so could cause the hood and make sure it locks into place. hood to fly open and result in an accident. ț If you see steam or smoke coming

3-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Cancel switch from the engine compartment, closed, when not in use, and avoid injury by not opening the prevent children’s access to car hood. keys.

TRUNK LID OPENER OPERATION The trunk lid release switch is located under WARNING the driver’s armrest.

ț Do not drive with the trunk lid SIP0283 open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the When the cancel switch located inside the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas” in the glove box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be “5. Starting and driving” section opened with the trunk lid release switch or the of this manual. key fob. It can be opened only with the emergency key or wallet key. ț Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent SIP0097 them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they To open the trunk lid, pull the release switch. could be seriously injured. Keep To close, push the trunk lid down. the car locked, with the trunk

3-12

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

KEY OPERATION force applied may cause the mechanism to malfunction.

CAUTION

ț The lid will automatically close from a partly open position. To avoid pinching, keep hands and fingers away from trunk opening.

SIP0284 ț Do not let children operate the trunk lid. To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close remove the key, lower and push the trunk lid down. AUTO CLOSURE If the trunk lid is pulled down to a partly open position, the lid will pull itself to the closed position. Do not apply excessive force when the auto closure is operating. Excessive

3-13

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

AUTO OPEN & CLOSE To automatically open or close the trunk lid, TRUNK LID (if so equipped) operate the remote controller, trunk opener, or closing switch.

CAUTION

ț Make sure there is no one around the trunk before operation. Be careful not to pinch your fingers, arms or neck as the trunk will open or close automatically. ț A buzzer will sound during operation, stand away from the trunk lid. ț Do not leave the vehicle before the trunk lid closes completely. ț Do not overload the trunk. Other- wise, when the trunk lid is closed automatically, the lid or load SIP0319 could be damaged or deformed.

3-14

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

ț The automatic trunk opening and closing How to use the trunk opener ț The automatic function may not mechanism will not operate under the ț Pull the opener located on the lower operate if the wind is strong, or following conditions: portion of the driver’s door armrest to when the trunk lid is covered by ț when the selector lever is in a position unlock the trunk lid. snow or frozen. other than P ț ț If a heavy accessory is attached ț when the vehicle speed is above 7 km/h Pull on the opener for about 1 second until to the trunk lid, the automatic (11 MPH) a peep sound is heard. The trunk will open automatically all the way. function may not operate. ț The automatic operation will be canceled if ț Do not operate the automatic the following is performed during auto- When the anti-theft alarm is set, it is not function when leaning against the matic trunk opening or closing operation. possible to unlock the trunk with the trunk trunk lid or with a load on the ț when the trunk opener is pulled opener. ț trunk lid. when the remote controller trunk switch Refer to how to cancel the trunk opener. is pushed for more than 0.5 seconds ț Do not operate the automatic ț when the closing switch is pushed Opening with the remote con- function in a car wash. ț when the selector lever is shifted to a troller position other than P ț Approach the trunk and push the trunk ț If opening and closing operations are ț when the vehicle speed is above 7 km/h button on the remote controller for about performed continuously, a protection cir- (11 MPH) 0.5 seconds. The trunk will be unlocked. ț when trunk lid closing operation is cuit may operate to cancel operations. ț stopped by hand before the auto closure After unlocking the trunk, push the trunk ț If the engine is started during automatic mechanism operates button on the remote controller for about operation, an erroneous operation may 0.5 seconds. The trunk will open automati- occur. cally all the way.

3-15

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Opening without using auto- INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE matic operation prevent children’s access to car keys. If you do not want to use the automatic function (such as in the rain), the trunk will only be unlocked by the following operations: The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and ț when the trunk opener is pulled for less adults in the event they become locked inside than 1 second the trunk. ț when the trunk switch on the remote To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the controller is pushed only once release handle until the lock releases and SIP0291 Closing push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is made of a material that glows in the dark after Push and hold the close switch on the trunk a brief exposure to ambient light. lid for about 1 second until a peep sound is WARNING heard. The trunk lid will close automatically all The handle is located on the trunk lid inside the way. Closely supervise children when they the trunk compartment. are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk closed, when not in use, and

3-16

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

FUEL FILLER LID FUEL FILLER CAP shuts off automatically. Contin- OPENER OPERATION ued refueling may cause fuel WARNING overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. ț Gasoline is extremely flammable ț and highly explosive under certain Use only an original equipment conditions. You could be burned type fuel filler cap as a replace- or seriously injured if it is misused ment. It has a built-in safety valve or mishandled. Always stop en- needed for proper operation of gine and do not smoke or allow the fuel system and emission open flames or sparks near the ve- control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunc- SIP0226 hicle when refueling. tion and possible injury. It could To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener ț Fuel may be under pressure. Turn also cause the malfunction indi- switch. To lock, close the fuel filler lid the cap one-half turn, and wait for cator lamp to come on. any hissing sound to stop to pre- securely. ț vent personal injury from fuel Never pour fuel into the throttle body spraying out. Then remove the to attempt to start your vehicle. cap. ț Do not fill a portable fuel con- ț Do not attempt to top off the fuel tainer in the vehicle or trailer. tank after the fuel pump nozzle Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid,

3-17

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

vapor or gas in any vehicle or paint damage. trailer. To reduce the risk of se- ț Tighten until the fuel filler cap rious injury or death when filling clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel portable fuel containers: filler cap properly may cause the • Always place the container malfunction indicator lamp on the ground when filling. (MIL) to illuminate. If the lamp illuminates because • Do not use electronic devices the fuel filler cap is loose or while filling. missing, tighten or install the cap • Keep the pump nozzle in con- and continue to drive the vehicle. tact with the container while The lamp should turn off you are filling it. after a few driving trips. If the • Use only approved portable lamp does not turn off after fuel containers for flammable a few driving trips, have the ve- liquid. hicle inspected by an INFINITI retailer. For additional information, see “Malfunction indicator CAUTION lamp (MIL)” in the “2. Instru- SIP0322 ments and controls” section. ț If fuel is spilled on the car body, The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten flush it away with water to avoid the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.

3-18

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while TILT OPERATION forward or backward to the desired position. refueling. WARNING STEERING WHEEL Do not adjust the steering wheel any WARNING closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. Do not adjust the steering wheel The driver’s air bag inflates with great while driving. You could lose control force. If you are unrestrained, leaning of your vehicle and cause an acci- forward, sitting sideways or out of po- dent. SIP0287 sition in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You Push the lever to adjust the steering wheel up may also receive serious or fatal inju- or down to the desired position. ries from the air bag if you are up Jump up operation against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far The automatic drive positioner system will away as practical from the steering make the steering wheel jump up wheel. Always use the seat belts. automatically. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily. TELESCOPIC OPERATION Push the lever to adjust the steering wheel

3-19

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

SUN VISORS MIRRORS USING THE SUN VISORS AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE IN- SIDE MIRROR CAUTION

ț Store the main sun visor after storing the sub-sun visor and the extension sun visor. ț Do not pull the sub-sun visor and the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

SIP0272 1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor. The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to 2. To block glare from the side, remove the the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle main sun visor from the center mount and following you. swing it to the side. 3. Then, to block glare from the front too, When the inside mirror switch is in the AUTO swing down the sub-sun visor. position, excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. SIP0320 When the switch of the inside mirror is in the

3-20

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

OFF position, the inside mirror will operate left or right side mirror, then adjust using the Foldable outside mirrors normally. control button. Do not hang any object on the sensor or These mirrors will be heated when the rear apply glass cleaner. Doing so will re- window defogger switch is operated. duce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in improper operation. WARNING OUTSIDE MIRRORS Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving IPD073M to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the in- Push the outside mirrors backward to fold side mirror or glance over your shoul- them. der to properly judge distances to Reverse tilt-down feature (if so other objects. equipped) When the following steps are met, the selected SIP0288 mirror surface will turn downward to provide The outside mirror will operate only when the better rear visibility close to the vehicle. ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. 1. The ignition switch is ON. Turn the switch to the L or R side to select the

3-21

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

2. The outside mirror control switch is turned AUTOMATIC DRIVE The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return toLorR. POSITIONER to the positions before being set: 3. The shift lever is moved to R (Reverse). AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSI- ț When the key is inserted into the ignition After the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse), TIONER OPERATION switch. the mirror surface selected in step 2 will turn This system is designed so that the driver’s ț When the driver’s door is closed with the downward. seat and steering column will automatically key turned to LOCK. The selected mirror surface will return to its move when the automatic transmission selec- ț When the key is turned from ACC to ON original position when any of the following tor lever is in the P (Park) position. This while the automatic transmission selector have occurred: allows the driver to get into and out of the lever is in the P (Park) position. ț The shift lever is moved to any position driver’s seat more easily. Procedure for storing memory other than R (Reverse). The driver’s seat will slide backward and the Two positions can be stored in the automatic ț The outside mirror control switch is set to steering wheel will move up: drive positioner memory. Follow these pro- the N (Neutral) position. ț When the key is removed from the ignition cedures to use the memory system. ț The ignition switch is turned OFF. switch. ț For more information regarding this feature When the driver’s door is opened with the and how to save the R (Reverse) mirror key turned to LOCK. tilt-down adjustment in the “Automatic drive ț When the key is turned from ACC to LOCK positioner” memory, refer to “Automatic drive with the driver’s door open while the positioner” later in this section. automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

3-22

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

During this step, do not turn the ignition to 1. Set the parking brake. any positions other than ON. 2. Turn the ignition ON. (Do not start the 4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec- engine.) onds, push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully 3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at for at least 1 second. least 1 second to operate the automatic The indicator light for the pushed memory drive positioner. switch will come on and stay on for 4. Turn the outside mirror control switch to L approximately 5 seconds after pushing the SIP0286 (left). switch. After the indicator light goes off, 1. Set the automatic transmission selector the selected positions are stored in the 5. Depress the brake pedal. lever to the P (Park) position. selected memory (1 or 2). 6. Move the automatic transmission shift 2. Turn the ignition ON. If memory is stored in the same memory lever to R (Reverse). 3. Adjust the driver’s seat, outside mirrors switch, the previous memory will be de- 7. Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing and steering column to the desired posi- leted. position for backing up by operating the tions by manually operating each adjusting Procedure for storing the outside outside mirror control switch. switch. For additional information, see mirror positions for best visibility 8. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec- “Seats” in the “1. Seats, restraints and when backing up onds, push the memory switch 1 or 2 supplemental air bag systems” section and Two outside mirror positions for backing up selected in step 3 fully for at least 1 “Steering wheel”, “Mirrors” earlier in this can be stored in the automatic drive positioner second. section. memory. ț The indicator light for the pushed memory

3-23

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

switch will come on and stay on for cator light will stay on for approximately 5 position with the indicator light flashing, approximately 5 seconds after pushing the seconds. and then the light will stay on for approxi- switch. After the indicator light goes off, mately 5 seconds. ț If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the selected mirror position is stored in the the fuse blows, the memory will be can- System operation selected memory (1 or 2). celed. In such a case, reset the desired The automatic drive positioner system will not 9. Turn the outside mirror control switch to R positions using the following procedures. work or will stop operating under the follow- (right). 1. Open and close the driver’s door more ing conditions: Repeat the above procedure to adjust the than two times with the ignition key in the ț right mirror position and store in the when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 LOCK position. selected memory. km/h). 2. Reset the desired position using the pre- ț when any two or more of the memory ț When the driver’s seat, outside mirror and vious procedure. switches are simultaneously pushed while steering column are not in the memorized the automatic drive positioner is operating. position, the outside mirror will move with Selecting the memorized position ț the initial tilt-down angle, if the reverse 1. Set the automatic transmission selector when the adjusting switch for the driver’s tilt-down position is stored. seat is turned on while the automatic drive lever to the P (Park) position. positioner is operating. Confirming memory storage 2. Turn the ignition ON. ț when the system is canceled by the elec- ț Turn the ignition ON and push the SET 3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at tronic systems “SETTING” on the informa- switch. If the main memory has not been least 1 second. tion display. stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the The driver’s seat, outside mirror and steer- ț when the memory switch 1 or 2 is not memory has stored the position, the indi- ing column will move to the memorized pushed for at least 1 second.

3-24

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

ț when the seat has been already moved to the memorized position. ț when no seat position is stored in the memory switch. The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled. See “Automatic seat slide in getting off” and “Lift steering column when exiting vehicle” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems” section.

3-25

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 4 MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Safety note ...... 4-2 Automatic operation...... 4-14 Control panel button functions ...... 4-3 Manual operation ...... 4-16 Names of the components ...... 4-3 Ambient temperature...... 4-16 How to use joystick and “ENTER” Rear control button (if so equipped)... 4-17 button ...... 4-4 Operating tips...... 4-17 How to use “PREV” button...... 4-4 In-cabin microfilter...... 4-17 Setting up the start-up screen (for models Servicing climate control...... 4-18 with navigation system)...... 4-5 Audio system...... 4-18 How to use the “SETTING” button...... 4-5 Radio...... 4-18 “Audio” settings...... 4-6 FM radio reception...... 4-19 “Display” settings ...... 4-6 AM radio reception ...... 4-19 Vehicle electronic systems...... 4-7 Satellite radio reception ...... 4-20 Language/unit (for models without naviga- Audio operation precautions...... 4-20 tion system) ...... 4-9 FM-AM radio with cassette player and com- Rear view monitor (if so equipped)...... 4-10 pact disc (CD) changer...... 4-22 How to read the displayed lines ...... 4-10 CD care and cleaning...... 4-32 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-11 Steering wheel switch for audio Operating tips...... 4-11 control...... 4-32 Ventilators...... 4-12 Audio rear control switch (if so Automatic climate control ...... 4-13 equipped) ...... 4-33

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ Antenna ...... 4-34 Voice-activated control system (VACS) ... 4-40 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-35 Features...... 4-40 Vehicle information display ...... 4-35 Using the system ...... 4-40 Warning indicator...... 4-36 Personal vocabulary ...... 4-41 Vehicle information display...... 4-37 How to say numbers...... 4-41 Trip computer information...... 4-37 Voice command descriptions...... 4-42 Fuel economy information ...... 4-38 Maintenance information...... 4-38 Speaker adaptation (SA) mode ...... 4-46 Tire pressure information ...... 4-39 Trouble-shooting guide...... 4-49

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

SAFETY NOTE ț In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, WARNING spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop ț Positioning of the heating or air using the system immediately conditioning controls and display and contact your nearest INFINITI controls should not be done while retailer. Ignoring such conditions driving, in order that full attention may lead to accidents, fire, or may be given to the driving opera- electric shock. tion. ț Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock. ț Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

4-2

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONTROL PANEL BUTTON When you use this system, make sure the FUNCTIONS engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: “ENTER” button This is a button on the control panel. “Display” key This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function. NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS 1. “AUTO” automatic climate control on button; refer to page 4-13.

SIH0137 2. Temperature control knob (driver only or driver and passenger); refer to page 4-13.

4-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

3. “OFF” button for climate control system 13.“SAT” satellite band select button; refer to rate Navigation (NAVI) system Owner’s off. page 4-22. Manual. 4. “AUTO PASS” on button (passenger 14.“TAPE” play button; refer to page 4-22. HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND side); refer to page 4-13. 15.“CD” play button; refer to page 4-22. “ENTER” BUTTON 5. Temperature control knob (passenger Choose an item on the display using the 16.“PTY” program type button; refer to page side); refer to page 4-13. joystick and push the “ENTER” button for 4-21. operation. 6. “ ” front defogger button; refer to 17.A/C and audio control button “ ”to page 4-13. “ ”; refer to page 4-13 and 4-22. HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON 7. Air recirculation “ ”, fresh “ ” 18.“SETTING” button for audio, display and This has two functions. button; refer to page 4-13. Vehicle Electronic Systems; refer to page ț Go back to the previous display (cancel). 8. “ ” rear window defogger button; 4-5. If you touch “PREV” button during setup, the refer to the “2. Instruments and controls” 19.JOYSTICK and “ENTER” push button; setup will be canceled and/or the display will section. refer to the right column. return to the previous screen. 9. “AUDIO” on button; refer to page 4-22. 20.“PREV” previous button; refer to the right ț Finish setup. 10.Volume control knob for audio column. If you touch this button after the setup is 11.“OFF” button for audio 21.“INFO” vehicle information button; refer to completed, the setup will start over, and the page 4-36. display will return to the climate control, 12.“FM⅐AM” AM, FM1 and FM2 band select 22.“MAP” button (Navigation system Audio mode or Navigation screen (if so button; refer to page 4-22. equipped vehicles only); refer to the sepa- equipped).

4-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

If you want to return to the climate control HOW TO USE THE “SET- mode screen, push the “AUTO” on button. To TING” BUTTON return to the audio mode, push the “Audio” button. To set Audio (Bass, Treble, Balance, Fader and Button Tone/Beep Response) Display SETTING UP THE START-UP (Brightness/Contrast, Display Off, Settings SCREEN (for models with naviga- Display Duration and Audio & Climate Control tion system) Dual Display), Vehicle Electronic systems and When you turn the ignition key to ACC, the Navigation system (if so equipped), push the SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on “SETTING” button. SIH0089 the screen. Read the warning and select the The following display will appear when the * Please refer to the separate Navigation “I AGREE” key then push the “ENTER” system Owner’s Manual. button. “SETTING” button is pushed. If you do not push the “ENTER” button, this For models with navigation system: system will not proceed to the next step display. To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate Navigation system Owner’s Manual.

4-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

For models without navigation system: “Audio” key with the joystick and pushing the Tone/Beep Response” key using the joy- “ENTER” button. stick and push the “ENTER” button. The indicator of the “Button Tone/Beep Re- sponse” key will turn off. To maintain the sound quality and speech intelligibility, select the “Noise Compensa- tion” key and push the “ENTER” button. The indicator light of the “Noise Compensa- tion” key will turn green.

SIH0090 To return to the SETTING screen, push the SIH0091 “PREV” button or “SETTING” button. For rear view monitor equipped models: To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound “DISPLAY” SETTINGS To adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint and (balance and fader), select the “Bass”, The following display will appear when push- Color of the rear view monitor, push the “Treble”, “Balance”or“Fader” key and ing the “SETTING” button, selecting “Dis- “SETTING” button with the rear view monitor adjust using the joystick. play” key and pushing the “ENTER” button. on, select the item key and adjust the level using the joystick. When the “Button Tone/Beep Response” indicator turns green, the beep will sound. “AUDIO” SETTINGS (When you first receive the vehicle, the beep The following display will appear after push- will be set to off.) ing the “SETTING” button and selecting To stop the beep, select the “Button

4-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Display Off display on the audio or air conditioner control will return to the previous display automati- To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING” cally. button and select the “Display” key and “Display Off” key. The indicator of the To set the confrontation continuance opera- “Display Off” will turn on to green. When tion time, select the current time setting with any mode button is pushed with the screen the joystick and push the “ENTER” button. off, the screen turns on for further operation. Audio & Climate Control Dual The screen will turn off automatically 5 sec- Display SIH0138 onds after the operation is finished on the map display (Navigation system only), the Audio & Select the “Audio & Climate Control Dual Brightness/Contrast (Map Back- Display” key and push the “ENTER” button. ground (for models with naviga- Climate Control Dual Display, SETTING or VEHICLE INFO. modes. The audio and climate control setting condition system)) tion will appear on the screen. To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING” To adjust the brightness and contrast of the button and select the “Display” key and To return to the setting screen, push the screen, select the “Brightness/contrast” “Display Off” key, then set the screen to on “SETTING” button. key and push the “ENTER” button. Then you by pushing the “ENTER” button. can adjust the brightness to Darker or VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Brighter, the contrast to Lower or Higher Settings Display Duration The following display will appear when select- using the joystick. You can set the confrontation continuance ing the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key The Map Background is for models with operation time for the audio, climate control with the joystick and pushing the “ENTER” navigation system. Please refer to the separate and settings. When you finish setting the button. navigation system Owner’s Manual. confrontation continuance operation time, the

4-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

You can set the various electronic systems returns to the original position for exceptional operating conditions. ease of entry and exit. Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle The driver’s seat automatically moves back and returns to the original position for exceptional ease of exit and entry. SIH0141 Illuminate interior when unlocking vehicle SIH0139 To set an operating condition, select the applicable item using the joystick, and push The interior light automatically turns on when the “ENTER” button. the door is unlocked using the key fob or ignition key. The indicator light alternately turns on and off each time the “ENTER” button is pressed. Interior lights off delay Indicator light is illuminated. — ON The length of time required to unlock a door Indicator light is not illuminated. — OFF and remove the key from the ignition switch Lift steering column when exiting can be set. The length of time required to vehicle close the driver’s door and turn off the interior light can also be set. SIH0140 The steering column automatically tilts up and Select the “Interior Lights Off Delay” key,

4-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS then move the joystick to the left or right to horn, or Hazard indicators only, the following HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the initial adjust the timer. conditions will be set. conditions. Sensitivity of automatic head- MODE Lock Unlock LANGUAGE/UNIT lights Hazard indi- Hazard — (For models without navigation No operation Automatic light illumination can be set as cators only twice system) Hazard indi- Hazard — desired. Hazard — The following display will appear when select- cators and twice once ing the “Language/Unit” key and pushing Select the “Sensitivity of Automatic horn Horn — once the “ENTER” button. Headlights” key, then move the joystick to the left (lower) or right (higher). Remote custom settings If you unlock a door with the same key fob Automatic headlights off delay used when locking with the “Remote Cus- You can control how long it takes the auto- tom Settings” key on, the audio settings you matic turn off timer to extinguish the head- made last time remain the same. As may as lights in AUTO position. four electronic ignition keys can be used with Select the “Automatic Headlights Off De- one vehicle. lay” key, then move the joystick to the left or Return all vehicle settings to de- right to adjust the timer. fault SIH0148 Keyless remote response — When this key is turned on using the Language: English or French horn/lights “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE- Unit: US — Mile, °F, MPG When this key is set to Hazard indicators and Metric — km, °C, /100 km

4-9

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

You can select the language and unit using HOW TO READ THE DIS- the joystick and “ENTER” button. is used. Objects in the rear view PLAYED LINES monitor will appear visually op- REAR VIEW MONITOR (if so posite than when viewed in the Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and equipped) rear view and outside mirrors. distances are displayed on the monitor. When the selector lever is shifted into the R ț Do not put anything on the rear (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows view camera. The rear view cam- view to the rear of the vehicle. era is installed beside the license plate light. WARNING ț When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not ț The rear view camera is a conve- to spray it around the camera. nience but it is not a substitute for Otherwise, water may enter the proper backing and should not be camera unit causing water con- SIH0118 used for lane changes. Always densation on the lens, a malfunc- They are indicated as reference distances to turn and check that it is safe to do tion, fire or an electric shock. objects. Displayed lines indicate distances 1.5 so before backing up or changing ț Do not strike the camera. It is a feet (red), 3 feet (yellow), 7 feet (green) and 10 lanes. Always back up slowly. precision instrument. Otherwise, feet (green) [0.5 m (red), 1 m (yellow), 2 m ț Objects viewed in the rear view it may malfunction or cause dam- (green) and 3 m (green)] from the lower part monitor differ from actual dis- age resulting in a fire or an elec- of the monitor. tance because a wide-angle lens tric shock. The vehicle clearance lines are wider

4-10

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS than the actual clearance. has been shifted to R. Objects may be monitor may differ somewhat from those of distorted momentarily until the rear view the actual object. ADJUSTING THE SCREEN monitor screen is displayed completely. ț When the contrast of objects is low at To adjust the quality of the screen, refer to When the selector lever is returned to a night, pushing the “ENTER” button may HOW TO USE THE “SETTING” BUTTON in position other than R, it may take some not change the brightness. this section. time until the screen changes. Objects on ț ț When it is difficult to see in the rearward the screen may be distorted until they are Objects on the monitor may not be clear in direction due to shady conditions, press completely displayed. a dark place or at night. the “ENTER” button to make objects in the ț When the temperature is extremely high or ț If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, monitor brighter. low, the screen may not clearly display the rear view monitor may not clearly ț To change the brightness, press the “EN- objects. This is not a malfunction. display objects. Clean the camera. TER” button again, turn the key switch ț When strong light directly enters the cam- ț Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to OFF or shift the reverse and wait for 10 era, objects may not be displayed clearly. clean the camera. This will cause discol- seconds. oration. To clean the camera, wipe with a ț Vertical lines may be seen in objects on OPERATING TIPS cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning the screen. This is due to strong reflected agent and then wipe with a dry cloth. ț When the selector lever is shifted to R, light from the bumper. This is not a objects on the monitor screen automati- malfunction. ț Do not damage the camera as the monitor cally change to those of the rear view screen may be adversely affected. ț monitor. However, the radio can be heard. The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction. ț Do not use body wax on the camera ț It may take some time until the rear view window. Wipe off the wax with a clean monitor is displayed after the selector lever ț The colors of objects on the rear view

4-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water. VENTILATORS

SIH0098

SIH0097

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. : This symbol indicates that the vents are closed. SIH0116 : This symbol indicates that the vents are open.

4-12

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE 1. “AUTO” climate control on button CONTROL 2. Temperature control knob (driver only, or driver and passenger) 3. “OFF” button for climate control system 4. “AUTO PASS” on button (passenger side) 5. Temperature control knob (passenger side) 6. “ ” front defogger button 7. Intake air control “ ” button 8. Air conditioner control “ ” (“DRIVER” key), “ ”(“DUAL” key) buttons 9. A/C control “ ”(“ ” fan speed up), “ ”(“ ” fan speed down) 10.A/C control “ ”(“PASS” key), “ ”(“ECON” key) buttons SIH0142

4-13

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Start the engine and operate the controls to each temperature control knob and A/C con- ț activate the air conditioner (A/C). Positioning of the heater and air trol buttons “ ”to“ ”. conditioner controls should not be done while driving, so full atten- AUTOMATIC OPERATION WARNING tion may be given to vehicle Cooling and/or dehumidified operation. heating (AUTO) ț The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the en- This mode may be used all year round. The When the “AUTO” button or “AUTO PASS” gine is running. system works automatically to maintain a button is pushed, the “AUTO CLIMATE CON- constant temperature. Air flow distribution and ț Do not leave children, impaired TROL” screen will appear. fan speed are also controlled automatically. adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, tem- 1. Push the “AUTO”or“AUTO PASS” peratures in a closed vehicle button on. (AUTO will appear on the could quickly become high display.) enough to cause severe or possi- 2. Turn the temperature control knob to set bly fatal injuries to people or the desired temperature. animals. For normal operation, adjust the tempera- ț Do not use the recirculation mode ture control knob to about 75°F (24°C). for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale SIH0147 3. When selecting the “DUAL” key by push- and the windows to fog up. ing A/C control button “ ” or when You can individually set driver and front the passenger side temperature control passenger side temperature and air flow using knob is turned, the “DUAL” key indicator

4-14

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

will turn on (green) and the temperature will turn off on the screen.). 2. Turn the temperature control knob to set and air flow can be controlled individually the desired temperature. 2. Turn the temperature control knob to set from the driver and front passenger sides. the desired temperature. ț To quickly remove ice from the outside of 4. To turn off the climate control system, the windows, set the A/C fan speed at its ț The temperature of the passenger compart- maximum by pushing the “A/C” control push the “OFF” button. ment will be maintained automatically. Air button “ ” and the A/C temperature flow distribution and fan speed are also Economical operation (ECON) at the highest by using the temperature controlled automatically. Economical operation reduces some load to control knob. ț Do not set the temperature lower than the the engine to improve the fuel economy. It ț As soon as possible after the windshield is outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys- allows higher humidity than normal operation. clean, push the “ ” button to return to tem may not work properly. Pushing the “ECON” key using “A/C” control the auto mode. ț If the windows fog up, do not use the button “ ” changes operations as fol- ț When the front defogger “ ” button Heating mode. lows. is pushed, the air conditioner will auto- A/C → ECON → (A/C off) → ECON 3. To return to the air conditioner AUTO matically be turned on at outside tempera- (A/C) mode, push the “AUTO” climate tures above 23°F (−5°C) to defrost the Push the AUTO button to turn on the auto- control on button. (The AUTO will be windshield. The air recirculation mode matic operation. displayed on the screen.) “ ” will automatically be turned off. Heating (A/C off) Dehumidified defogging Outside air is drawn into the passenger Use this mode when you need to heat only. compartment to improve defogging perfor- 1. Push the front defogger “ ” button mance. 1. Push the “ECON” key using “A/C” control on. (The indicator light on the switch will button “ ” twice (ECON indicator illuminate.)

4-15

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

MANUAL OPERATION defrosting mode “ ”. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Fan speed control Air flow control The outside ambient temperature will be displayed. Push the “A/C” control button “ ”or Pushing the “A/C” control button “ ” to change the fan speed manually. “ ” (Select the “ ” key — The ambient temperature sensor is located in driver side) or “ ” (Select the front of the radiator. The sensor may be Push the “AUTO” button to return to auto- “ ” key — passenger side) selects affected by road or engine heat, wind direction matic control of the fan speed. the air outlet to provide: and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual outside temperature or Automatic intake air control : Air flow from front center, side and the temperature displayed on various signs or rear ventilators. Push the intake air control button “ billboards. ” to make the intake air controlled : Air flow from front center, side and automatically (Fresh, FRE/REC and Recircula- rear ventilators, and front and rear tion). The indicator light on the “ side foot outlets. will come on. : Air flow mainly from front and rear Air recirculation foot outlets. Push the intake air control button “ : Air flow from defroster and front and ” to recirculate interior air inside the rear foot outlets. vehicle. The indicator light on the “ ” To turn system off side will come on. Push the OFF button. The air recirculation “ ” cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front

4-16

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

REAR CONTROL BUTTON (if so rear seat passenger using the following cli- equipped) mate control button items in the rear seat. “AUTO” button: automatic climate control mode on “ button: Fan speed control up (Max fan speed → return to Low fan speed) “ ” button: Air flow selecting (center console) IHA017M “ ” button: Temperature control The sensor on the instrument panel helps up/down maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor. OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and IN-CABIN MICROFILTER outside air temperature are low, the air flow The climate control system is equipped with a from the foot outlets may not operate for 20 to in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, 150 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After dust, etc. and it is also equipped with a the coolant temperature warms up, air flow deodorant filter to reduce odor. To make sure from the foot outlets will operate normally. air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates SIH0136 efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual. To You can adjust the climate control system for

4-17

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS replace the filter, contact your INFINITI re- Your INFINITI retailer will be able to service strength, distance from radio transmitter, tailer. your environmentally friendly climate control buildings, bridges, mountains and other ex- system. ternal influences. Intermittent changes in re- The filter should be replaced if air flow ception quality normally are caused by these is extremely decreased or when win- external influences. dows fog up easily during operating WARNING heater or air conditioning system. Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- The climate control system contains hicle may influence radio reception SERVICING CLIMATE CON- refrigerant under high pressure. To quality. TROL avoid personal injury, any air condi- Radio reception The climate control system in your INFINITI is tioner service should be done only by charged with a refrigerant designed with the an experienced technician with Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with environment in mind. This refrigerant will proper equipment. state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance not harm the earth’s ozone layer. How- radio reception. These circuits are designed to ever, special charging equipment and lubri- AUDIO SYSTEM extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. cant are required when servicing your INFINITI RADIO air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or However there are some general characteris- lubricants will cause severe damage to your Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press the “AUDIO” on button to turn on the radio. tics of both FM and AM radio signals that can climate control system. See “Capacities and If you listen to the radio with the engine not affect radio reception quality in a moving recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “10. running, the key should be turned to the ACC vehicle, even when the finest equipment is Technical and consumer information” for cli- position. used. These characteristics are completely mate control system refrigerant and lubricant normal in a given reception area, and do not recommendations. Radio reception is affected by station signal

4-18

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS indicate any malfunction in your INFINITI FM RADIO RECEPTION reduced by adjusting the treble control coun- radio system. terclockwise to reduce treble response. Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to Reception conditions will constantly change 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single Multipath reception: Because of the reflective because of vehicle movement. Buildings, ter- channel) FM having slightly more range than characteristics of FM signals, direct and re- rain, signal distance and interference from stereo FM. External influences may sometimes flected signals reach the receiver at the same other vehicles can work against ideal recep- interfere with FM station reception even if the time. The signals may cancel each other, tion. Described below are some of the factors FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The resulting in momentary flutter or loss of that can affect your radio reception. strength of the FM signal is directly related to sound. the distance between the transmitter and AM RADIO RECEPTION receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same character- AM signals, because of their low frequency, istics as light. For example they will reflect off can bend around objects and skip along the objects. ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away earth. Because of these characteristics. AM from a station transmitter, the signals will signals are also subject to interference as they tend to fade and/or drift. travel from transmitter to receiver. IHA018M Static and flutter: During signal interference Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing from buildings, large hills or due to antenna through freeway underpasses or in areas with position, usually in conjunction with in- many tall buildings. It can also occur for creased distance from the station transmitter, several seconds during ionospheric turbu- static or flutter can be heard. This can be lence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

4-19

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical cases and away from direct sunlight, sound, and should be removed peri- power lines, electric signs and even traffic heat, dust, moisture and magnetic odically with a head cleaning tape. If lights. sources. the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be dis- ț Direct sunlight can cause the cas- SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION assembled for cleaning. sette to become deformed. The use of When the satellite radio is first installed or the deformed cassettes may cause the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio cassette to jam in the player. may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite ț Do not use cassettes with labels radio ON for satellite radio to receive all of the which are peeling and loose. If used, necessary data. the label could jam in the player. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAU- ț If a cassette has loose tape, insert a TIONS pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly Cassette player around the hubs. Loose tape may ț To maintain good quality sound, cause tape jamming and wavering INFINITI recommends using cassette sound quality. tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in ț Over a period of time, the playback length. head, capstan and pinch roller may ț Cassette tapes should be removed collect a tape coating residue as the from the player when not in use. tape is played. This residue accumu- Store cassettes in their protective lation can cause weak or wavering

4-20

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Compact Disc (CD) player ț During cold weather or rainy days, ț The following CDs may not work the player may malfunction due to the properly: humidity. If this occurs, remove the • Copy control compact discs CD and dehumidify or ventilate the (CCCD) player completely. • Recordable compact discs ț The player may skip while driving on (CD-R) rough roads. • Rewritable compact discs (CD- ț The CD player sometimes cannot RW) function when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease ț Do not use the following CDs as they the temperature before use. may cause the CD player to malfunction. ț Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) round discs that have the “COM- • 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an PACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on adapter the disc or packaging. • CDs that are not round ț Do not expose the CD to direct sun- • CDs with a paper label light. • CDs that are warped, scratched, ț SIH0087 CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, or have abnormal edges scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work properly.

4-21

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

1. “AUDIO” on button 2. Volume control knob 3. “OFF” audio off button 4. “FM⅐AM” FM1, FM2, AM band select button 5. “SAT” satellite channel select button (if so equipped) 6. “CD” compact disc play button 7. “TAPE” tape play button 8. “PTY⅐CAT” program type and category select button 9. Audio control buttons “ ”, “ ” 10.Audio control buttons “ ”, “ ” 11.Audio control buttons “ ”, “ ” SIH0143 12.JOYSTICK and “ENTER” push button 13.“PREV” previous button

4-22

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Audio main operation loaded, the radio will come on. While the (FM) system is on, pushing the “OFF” button turns Head unit the system off. The radio has an FM diversity reception Turn the volume control knob to adjust the system, which employs two antennas printed volume. on the rear window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving Adjusting tone quality and speaker less interference. balance: The tape deck employs a permalloy head To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fader, which allows for improved reproduction of refer to “How to use the SETTING button” high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly earlier in this section. SIH0102 reduced by the combined use of the Dolby B (AM) NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto loud- Audio display ness circuit enhances the low frequency range “FM AM” button: automatically in both radio reception and tape When the “FM AM” button is pushed, the and CD playback. following display will appear on the screen, ON⅐OFF/Volume control: and play FM1/FM2 or AM. Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then When the “ENTER” button is pushed in the push the “AUDIO” on button while the system radio text screen while Push & Hold “ENTER” is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) to Update Station Msg is displayed, messages which was playing immediately before the will be updated to new information. SIH0103 system was turned off. When no CD or tape is

4-23

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

“ ” — Use the joystick “PTY⅐CAT” program type and cat- Up or down: Tuning ᮍ or ᮎ egory select button: When the “PTY⅐CAT” button is pushed dur- Right or left (for less than 1.5 seconds): Seek ing FM mode, the PROGRAM TYPE screen ᮍ or ᮎ will appear. Right or left (for more than 1.5 seconds): Scan When the “PTY⅐CAT” button is pushed dur- ᮍ or ᮎ ing the satellite radio mode, the CATEGORY “ ”to“ ” Memory stations screen will appear. Pushing the “PTY⅐CAT” SIH0146 To add a station to memory, hold the desired button repeated will change the category audio control button (1 - 6) (until a beep “ ” — Use the joystick to select satel- (upside only). sound is heard - if set). lite radio channel “SAT” satellite radio button (if the Right or left: Select the desired satellite radio unit is so equipped): channel. Holding it depressed will continue When the “SAT” button is pushed, the satellite the channel change. radio SAT1 or SAT2 mode will appear on the Up or down: Change the satellite radio cat- screen and then play satellite radio. SAT 1 egory. (for example: ROCK, JAZZ, NEWS ...) presets 1-6 and SAT 2 presets 1-6 are also “PTY⅐CAT”— In SAT mode, use to change available. the preset mode to category presets. To scroll SIH0144 channels within a preset category, press the preset button. The PTY name can be selected as follows and

4-24

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS the radio goes into the PTY interruption “TAPE” button: program search standby mode and the PTY name or frequency (APS) FF), “APS If the tape is inserted into the tape player then is displayed. REW” (APS REW) when the “TAPE” button is pushed, the TAPE key “ ” — Use the joystick to select PTY screen will appear and the tape will play. station or category: “ ”— “ ” program key The following display will also appear when a Up or down: Select the PTY name or category. tape is inserted into the tape player. “ ”— “ ” Dolby B NR (Noise Reduction) key Right or left: Seek the desired PTY station. “PTY” station names “CD” button: When the “CD” button is pushed, the CD CHANGER screen will appear and, if a CD is set into the CD changer, play the CD.

SIH0105 “ ”to“ ”: memory PTY stations Audio control button To add PTY stations to memory, hold the “ ”, “ ”— “FF” (fast forward), desired audio control button (1 - 6) (until a “REW” (rewind) key beep sound is heard). “ ”, “ ”— “APS FF” (automatic

4-25

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

more than 1.5 sec- When “FM AM” band select button is pushed onds. while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, “ ” fast for- the radio will come on at the station last ward, key played. “ ” rewind key The last station played will also come on when “ ”— “PROGRAM” key the “AUDIO” button is pushed to ON. The play pattern repeatedly will change as If another audio source is playing when the follows: “FM AM” band select button is turned to ON, SIH0145 the other audio source will automatically be ALL DISC REPEAT → 1 DISC REPEAT → 1 turned off and the last radio station played will “ ”, “ ”— “ ” (CD disc TRACK REPEAT → ALL DISC RANDOM → 1 come on. up), DISC RANDOM → ALL DISC REPEAT “ ” (CD disc The FM stereo indicator STEREO will glow “ ”— “TITLE” key down) key during FM stereo reception. When the stereo Pushing the “TITLE” key will change the “ ”, “ ”— Push the “ ”or broadcast signal is weak, the radio will auto- display from CD changer to disc and track title “ ” button for matically change from stereo to monaural when the CD is programmed with the text. less 1.5 seconds. reception. “ ” truck up, FM-AM radio operation TUNE (Tuning): “ ” truck down “FM AM” band select: To change the radio frequency or PTY name, key Pushing the “FM AM” band select button will move the joystick up (+) or down (−). “ ”, “ ”— Push the “ ”or change the band FM1/FM2 or AM. “ ”button for

4-26

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

second period will stop SCAN tuning and the If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the WARNING radio will remain tuned to that station. fuse blows, the radio memory will be cancelled. In that case, reset the desired stations. If the joystick is not moved within 5 seconds, The radio should not be tuned while SCAN tuning moves to the next station. Satellite radio operation — if so driving so full attention may be given equipped to vehicle operation. Station memory operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band Satellite radio mode select: (six for FM1, six for FM2). Pushing the “SAT” button will change the SEEK/SCAN tuning: satellite radio mode SAT1 or SAT2. If you Six stations can be set for the AM band. SEEK tuning have not obtained a satellite radio unit, “Sat- Move the joystick left or right for less than 1.5 1. Tune to the desired station using the ellite Radio is not Installed” will be shown on seconds. SEEK tuning begins from high to low joystick (SEEK/SCAN or TUNE). the screen. or low to high frequencies and stops at the 2. Push and hold the desired station control To establish a contract and service, contact next broadcasting station or seek tuning be- button (1 to 6) until the sound resumes. XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-852-9696 or gins for PTY selected name. (The radio mutes when the select button is http://activate.xmradio.com or Sirius Satellite SCAN tuning pushed.) Radio at 1-800-539-7474 or http:www. siriusradio.com. Move the joystick left or right for more than 3. The band indicator will then come on and 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins from high the sound will resume. Memorizing is now When “SAT” button is pushed while the to low or low to high frequencies and stops at complete. ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the channel last played. each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same Moving the joystick again during this 5 manner. The last station played will also come on when

4-27

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS the “AUDIO” button is pushed to ON. CHANGE satellite radio push the “ENTER” button. For more infor- If another audio source is playing when the category: mation, move the joystick down. Move the joystick up to go back to information “SAT” button is turned to ON, the other audio To change the satellite radio category (for display. To change the display from infor- source will automatically be turned off and the example: ROCK, JAZZ, NEWS ...), when sat- last radio channel played will come on. ellite radio mode appears on the screen, move mation to channel and/or category mode, push the “PREV” button. CHANNEL change: the joystick up (+) or down (−). ⅐ Station memory operations: To change the satellite radio channel, move “PTY CAT” mode: the joystick right (+) or left (−), to the desired ț To change the display mode from satellite Twelve channels (six for SAT1, six for SAT2) satellite radio channel. radio mode to category mode, push the can be set for the satellite radio. ⅐ To continuously change the channel quickly, “PTY CAT” button. Current category mode 1. Set to the desired channel using the move the joystick and hold it. will appear on the screen. joystick. ț To select the category, move the joystick 2. Push and hold the desired station control ⅐ WARNING right or left, or push the “PTY CAT” button button (1 to 6) until the sound resumes. (“PTY⅐CAT” button is only for seeking the The satellite radio mutes when the select category). The radio should not be tuned while button is pushed.) driving so full attention may be given ț To select the channel within the category, 3. The channel indicator will then come on to vehicle operation. move the joystick up (+) or down (−). and the sound will resume. Memorizing is Display mode: now complete. ț To display the information (for example, 4. Other buttons can be set in the same title, artist name) of the satellite channel, manner.

4-28

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the FF (Fast Forward), REW fuse blows, the radio memory will be can- CAUTION (Rewind): celled, in that case, reset the desired channels. Push the “ ” (fast forward) button to fast Cassette tape player operation Do not force the cassette tape into the forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the tape door. This could cause player “ ” (rewind) button. Either the FF or damage. REW symbol illuminates on the right side of the display window. If the system is turned off by pushing the To stop the FF or REW function, push the audio “OFF” button with the cassette tape still “ ” (fast forward) or “ ” (rewind) in the player, the tape will resume playing again, or the TAPE button. when the system is turned back on. APS (Automatic Pro- “TAPE” button PLAY: gram Search) FF, APS REW: SIH0133 ț When the “TAPE” button is pushed while When the “ ” (APS FF) button is Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then the CD is being played in the CD au- pushed while the tape is being played, the lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape tochanger, the CD will automatically be next program will start to play from the deck in the glove box. The cassette tape will turned off and the tape will turn on. beginning. Push the “ ” (APS FF) but- be automatically pulled into the player. ț If the “TAPE” button is pushed during ton several times to skip through programs. The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and either the FF, REW, APS FF or APS REW The tape will advance the number of times the the cassette tape will begin to play. function, the cassette tape enters the nor- button is pushed (up to nine programs). mal play mode. When the “ ” (APS REW) button is

4-29

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS pushed once, the program being played starts directions to play the other side when the first TAPE EJECT: over from the beginning. Push the side is completed. When this button is pushed with the tape “ ” (APS REW) button several times to If the “ ” button is pushed during the loaded, the tape will be ejected. skip back several selections. The tape will go FF or REW function, the cassette tape enters When the tape is ejected while it is being back the number of times the button is the normal play mode. pushed. played, the system will be turned off. “ ” Dolby B NR (Noise Either the FF or REW symbol flashes on the Reduction) key: Compact disc (CD) changer op- right side of the display window while search- eration Push the “ ” button for Dolby NR ing for the selection. encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape To stop the APS FF or APS REW function, noise. The indicator will come on. push the TAPE button. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under This system searches for the blank intervals license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing between selections. If there is a blank interval Corporation. Dolby NR and the double-D within one program or there is no interval symbol “ ” are trademarks of Dolby between programs, the system may not stop in Laboratories Licensing Corporation. the desired or expected location. Metal or chrome tape usage: SIH0134 “ ” Program key: The cassette player will be automatically set to Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON. Push the “ ” button to change the tape high performance play when playing a metal side while the tape is being played. or chrome cassette tape. “CD” button: The cassette tape will automatically change When the “CD” button is pushed with the

4-30

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS system off and the compact disc loaded, the audio output is muted during this operation, forward (or reverse) direction until the button system will turn on and the compact disc will and playing begins automatically. is released. start to play. When the “ ” button is pressed, playing ( “PROGRAM” key) pro- When the “CD” button is pushed with the switches to the first track on the previous disc. gram: compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio The audio output is muted during this opera- Press the “ ” button to change the playing, the tape or radio will automatically be tion, and playing begins automatically. playing mode condition as follows (track turned off and the compact disc will start to repeat, disc repeat, disc random and magazine play. (“ ”,“ ” key) Track up/down: random) while the display shows the present Disc insertion: mode condition for less than 3 seconds. Use these buttons to switch tracks on CDs. To insert a CD in the CD changer, select the ALL DISC → 1 DISC → 1 TRACK → ALL loading slot by pushing the CD select button When the “ ” button is pressed, playing DISC RANDOM → 1 DISC RANDOM → ALL (1 to 6). After the slot door opens, insert the switches to the beginning of the next track. DISC CD. The audio output is muted during this operation, and playing begins automatically. CD EJECT : The active CD indicator will turn green. The When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the other CD indicators will be red. When the “ ” button is pressed, playing compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be switches to the beginning of the current track. ejected. (“ ”,“ ” key) The audio output is muted during this opera- Disc up/down: tion, and playing begins automatically. To eject the discs selected by the CD select Use these buttons, to select another CD. button, push the EJECT button for less than If the “ ”or“ ” button is pressed 1.5 seconds. When the “ ” button is pressed, playing for over 1.5 seconds, the sound is attenuated switches to the first track on the next disc. The and the sound is playing at high speed in the To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button

4-31

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS for more than 1.5 seconds. ț To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR center to the outer edge using a clean, soft If the compact disc comes out and is not AUDIO CONTROL cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular removed, it will be pulled back into the motion. slot to protect it. (without 8 cm diameter Do not use a conventional record cleaner compact discs) or alcohol intended for industrial use. CD CARE AND CLEANING ț A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

SIH0108

“MODE” select switch Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2, CD SIH0082 autochanger and Tape.

ț Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc. ț Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used.

4-32

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Volume control switches This system searches for the blank intervals AUDIO REAR CONTROL between selections. If there is a blank interval Push the upper or lower side switch to SWITCH (if so equipped) within one program or there is no interval increase or decrease the volume. between programs, the system may not stop in Tuning the desired or expected location. Memory change (radio): FF REW (tape or CD changer): Push the tuning switch “ ”or“ ” Push the tuning switch “ ”or“ ” for less than 1.5 seconds to change the radio for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast frequency. forward the tape or to change the playing disc up or down. Seek tuning (radio): To stop the FF or REW function, press the Push the tuning switch “ ”or“ ” switch you pushed for more than 1.5 seconds for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or again. previous radio station. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW (tape or CD changer): Push the tuning switch “ ”or “ ” for less than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present program or SIH0135 skip to the next program. Push several times to skip back or skip through programs.

4-33

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

The audio system can be operated using the for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or switch you pushed for more than 1.5 seconds rear control switch. previous radio station. again. “ON⅐OFF” switch APS (Automatic Program Search) Volume control switch With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON FF, APS REW (tape or CD changer): Push the “ ” (front) side or “ ” position, push the “ON⅐OFF” switch to turn Push the “ ” switch ”or ” (rear) side of the switch to adjust the volume. the audio system ON or OFF. for less 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning “ ” Front side: Volume increases of the present program or skip to the next “MODE” select switch program. Push several times to skip back or “ ” Rear side: Volume decreases Push the “MODE” select switch to change the skip through programs. mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2, CD ANTENNA autochanger and tape. When the tape or CD This system searches for the blank intervals Window antenna autochanger is loaded, the mode changes to between selections. If there is a blank interval The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear Tape or CD autochanger. within one program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in window. Tuning switch the desired or expected location. Memory change (radio): FF REW (tape or CD changer): CAUTION Push the tuning switch “ ” (rear) or Push the tuning switch “ ”or ț “ ” (front) for less than 1.5 seconds to Do not place metalized film near “ ” for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind change the radio frequency. the rear window glass or attach or fast forward the tape or to change the any metal parts to it. This may Seek tuning (radio): playing disc up or down. cause poor reception or noise. Push the tuning switch “ ”or“ ” To stop the FF or REW function, press the

4-34

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

ț When cleaning the inside of the use of cellular telephones while trol Unit. rear window, be careful not to driving. ț Keep the antenna wire more than scratch or damage the rear win- ț If you must make a call while your 8 in (20 cm) away from the Mul- dow antenna. Lightly wipe along vehicle is in motion, the hands tiport Fuel Injection harness. Do the antenna with a dampened soft free cellular phone operational not route the antenna wire next to cloth. mode (if so equipped) is highly any harness. recommended. Exercise extreme ț Adjust the antenna standing-wave caution at all times so full atten- CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO ratio as recommended by the tion may be given to vehicle op- When installing a car phone or a CB radio in manufacturer. eration. your INFINITI, be sure to observe the follow- ț Connect the ground wire from the ț If a conversation in a moving ing cautions, otherwise the new equipment CB radio chassis to the body. may adversely affect the Multiport Fuel Injec- vehicle requires you to take ț tion system and other electronic parts. notes, pull off the road to a safe For details, consult your INFINITI location and stop your vehicle retailer. before doing so. WARNING VEHICLE INFORMATION ț A cellular telephone should not be CAUTION DISPLAY used while driving so full attention The warning light section is located in the may be given to vehicle operation. ț Keep the antenna as far as pos- meter panel. When a warning light illuminates Some jurisdictions prohibit the sible away from the Engine Con- or flashes on and off, the malfunction, reme-

4-35

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS dial measures and maintenance information meter, gauge or control, which corresponds ț Automatic transmission oil temperature concerning the related system appear on the with the warning light. ț Tire pressure display screen for taking corrective action. The A total of 15 warning lights illuminate for the display screen also shows information con- The display screen showing anything other following conditions: cerning driving convenience. than a warning can be replaced by a warning ț Malfunction (Engine) screen by simply pressing the ț The information shown on the screen “INFO” button. should be a guide to determine the con- ț Engine oil pressure dition of the vehicle. ț Supplemental air bag If the warning light in the instrument panel is ON or blinks, have it checked ț For safety reason, some of the warnings do ț Low brake fluid by your INFINITI retailer as soon as not appear on the display screen while the possible. vehicle is being driven. ț Overheating ț ț Charge If there are multiple problems, the warning WARNING INDICATOR light corresponding with the latest problem ț If a problem occurs when starting the engine Low washer fluid illuminates. or if a warning light in the meter cluster ț Low fuel ț The fuel level warning is displayed on the illuminates or flashes on and off during ț screen slightly after the warning light vehicle operation, the malfunction and reme- Parking brake illuminates on the meter panel. dial measures appear on the display screen. In ț Door open this case, immediately take corrective action. ț The parking brake drag warning light ț Anti-lock brake illuminates after the vehicle has been The warning indicator section is designed as ț Vehicle dynamic control driven for a while. a supplementary warning function inside the meter cluster. Also, check the condition of the ț Cruise control ț The door ajar and parking brake drag

4-36

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

warning lights sometimes do not illumi- panel. TRIP COMPUTER INFORMA- nate during low-speed operation. The following display will appear. TION ț When battery voltage drops below specifications, multiple warning lights can sometimes illuminate. If this occurs, continue to drive the vehicle for a while, and check if some of the warning lights go out. If any warning light still remains illuminated, the corresponding system may have a malfunction. All other systems are functioning properly. SIH0109 SIH0121 ț If you select the “Detailed Information” key when it is displayed, detailed information 2. Choose an item using the joystick and Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Average will be shown. push the “ENTER” button. Speed will be displayed. ț The detailed information cannot be shown 3. After setting, push the “PREV” button to To reset, push the “Reset” key with the when the vehicle is moving. Stop the return to the previous screen. “ENTER” button immediately before driving vehicle in a safe place to see the informa- the vehicle. tion. VEHICLE INFORMATION DIS- PLAY 1. Push the “INFO.” button on the control

4-37

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

FUEL ECONOMY INFORMA- Engine Oil, Oil Filter or Tire Rotation, TION choose an item using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button. The following example shows how to set the engine oil change interval. Use the same steps to set the other maintenance information.

SIH0112

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SIH0111

Average fuel economy and distance to empty will be displayed for reference. To reset the Average Fuel Economy, push the “Reset” key with the “ENTER” button. SIH0114 If the “Fuel Economy Record” key is 2. Reset the driving distance to the new pushed with the “ENTER” button, the average maintenance schedule. fuel consumption history will be displayed in SIH0113 3. Set the distance of the maintenance sched- graph along with the average for the previous ule. To determine the maintenance inter- Reset-to-Reset period. 1. To set the maintenance information for the val, refer to “Periodic maintenance sched-

4-38

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

ules” in the “9. Maintenance” section of TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION FLAT TIRE — very low tire air pressure this manual. Tire pressure rises and falls depend on heat 4. To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMA- by vehicle’s traveling condition and ambient TION, automatically when setting trip dis- temperature. tance is reached, select the “Display Maintenance Notification” key and WARNING push the “ENTER” button. 5. To turn the display to MAINTENANCE ț When the low tire pressure warn- INFO., push the “PREV” button. ing light is on and/or a WARNING is displayed on the screen, check Maintenance information display cannot be SIH0149 all tire pressures. operated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen Please refer to the “6. In case of vehicle in a safe place to see the information. indicates that the pressure is being measured. emergency” section for repairing. After a few driving trips, the pressures for all ț If the system is malfunctioning, a 4 tires will be displayed. WARNING for tire pressure will be The order of tire pressure figures displayed on indicated on the display. the screen does not correspond with the actual To confirm the details, push the order of the tire position. “ENTER” button. In case of low tire pressure, the FLAT TIRE ț When a spare tire is mounted or a warning light will come on and/or a warning is wheel is replaced, the pressure displayed on the screen:

4-39

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Personal directories of nametags for radio USING THE SYSTEM will not be indicated (** psi will station presets can be created, and spoken be indicated) and the low tire command help is provided. Initialization pressure warning system will not When the ignition switch is turned to the ON function. Contact your INFINITI FEATURES position, the initialization of the system is retailer as soon as possible for The VACS provides the following features: carried out, which takes a few seconds. When wheel replacement and/or system complete, the system is ready to accept voice ț Speaker-independent continuous natural resetting. commands. If the button is pressed before speech recognition engine initialization is complete, the message center ț Speaker adaptation or out-of-dialect display will show “VOICE NOT READY”. VOICE-ACTIVATED CON- speakers for two different users TROL SYSTEM (VACS) Operating tips ț Audible voice feedback (prompt, error, To get the best results from the system, The VACS (Voice-Activated Control System) confirmation, and speaker adaptation dia- observe the following: provides a safe and convenient way of con- logue) trolling vehicle systems such as the audio, ț Close the window before operating the ț Personal vocabulary (radio nametags, etc.) climate control and navigation (if so voice-activated control system (VACS). equipped). The system is controlled by the ț On-line help (general such as “Help”, and The voice-activated control system may PTT (Push to talk) button located on the more specific such as “Help Radio”) not be able to recognize voice commands steering wheel. Voice commands are picked due to surrounding noises (travel noise up by a microphone. When giving a com- and vibration). Be sure to operate the mand, voice feedback will be heard through system when the vehicle interior is quiet. the speaker, and messages will be shown on Set the fan speed to lower than level 3 the display. Voice feedback can be turned off. when operating the PTT button.

4-40

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

ț After pressing the PTT button, always wait If the system is processing a command, press the PTT button during feedback. for the beep before speaking. an error beep will sound and a message PERSONAL VOCABULARY such as “COMMAND CANCELED”, will ț Speak in a natural voice without pausing be displayed. The VACS provides 20 personal nametags between words. that can be associated with radio stations. The 4. If the VACS is activated, “LISTENING” will maximum length for each nametag is 3.75 Giving voice commands be displayed on the screen. seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi- 5. Say a command*. tion. The VACS provides two personal nametags *: Refer to the command list later in this that can be associated with speaker adaptation 2. Push an instant PTT (Push to talk) button section. memory locations. The length for each on the steering wheel. ț If you do not speak a command within nametag is 3.0 seconds. 5 seconds, the beep will sound and HOW TO SAY NUMBERS “NO SPEECH DETECTED” will be displayed on the screen. Numbers in voice commands must be given as follows. Either “zero” or “oh” can be used ț To cancel the command, press the for “0”. For information about specific com- PTT button again during feedback. mands, see Voice command descriptions on The “COMMAND CANCELED” will be the following page. displayed on the screen and finish. Radio stations SIH0117 6. If a command is activated, audio and visual feedback will be provided. Frequencies are said as in the following 3. The beep will sound. 7. To skip the aural feedback for a command, examples.

4-41

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

ț “Select nine thirty AM”, or “Select nine perature nineteen point oh”, or “Tempera- ț VOICE DELETE DIRECTORY thirty” (930). ture nineteen” (19.0). — For °C Deletes the personal nametags stored with each memory location. ț “Select one thousand” (1000). VOICE COMMAND DESCRIP- ț “Select ten forty” (1040). TIONS Dialog commands ț ț “Select thirteen hundred” (1300). In the command descriptions, optional words YES/NO are shown in square brackets [ ]. Data items Confirms a command after the prompt ț “Select seventeen ten” (1710). that you need to enter, such as phone “Please say YES or NO”. ț “Select ninety seven point nine FM”, or numbers, are shown in italics. For information ț CANCEL “Select ninety seven point nine” (97.9). on entering numbers in commands, see “How Cancels a command after the prompt ț “Tune one hundred point five” (100.5). to say numbers”. “Please say YES, NO or CANCEL”. ț “Tune one oh one point one FM” (101.1). General commands ț CORRECT/CORRECTION ț To clean the last group of numbers entered Temperatures (climate control) [VOICE] FEEDBACK ON/OFF Turns voice feedback successively on and when using the phone enter command. In climate control commands, say tempera- off. ț STORE tures as in the following examples. To store the phone number, say STORE ț VOICE DELETE MEMORY A/B ț after entering the phone number. “Temperature seventy four” (74). — For Deletes the trained voice stored in memory Fahrenheit (°F) AorB. Help commands ț “Temperature twenty one point five” ț VOICE [PLAY] DIRECTORY ț HELP (21.5). — For Centigrade (°C) Lists the personal nametags stored with Gives spoken information about the voice ț “Temperature nineteen point zero”, “Tem- each memory location. activation system.

4-42

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

ț HELP DIRECTORY Gives spoken information about the audio radio, with the last waveband and station Gives spoken information about the direc- voice commands. to be played. tory voice commands. ț HELP CLIMATE [CONTROL] ț RADIO SEEK/SEARCH [UP]/DOWN ț HELP RADIO Gives spoken information about the cli- Seeks up or down the current waveband Gives spoken information about the radio mate control voice commands. until the next station is found. voice commands. ț HELP DISPLAY ț [RADIO] TUNE/SELECT frequency ț HELP RADIO MEMORY Gives spoken information about the dis- [AM/FM] Gives spoken information about the radio play commands. RADIO frequency [AM/FM] memory commands. Tunes to the frequency given in the com- ț HELP VOICE MEMORY mand. ț HELP TAPE/CASSETTE Gives spoken information about the voice The frequency ranges are: Gives spoken information about the cas- memory commands. FM wavebands — 87.9 to 107.9 MHz in sette tape voice commands. ț HELP NAVIGATION steps of 0.2 MHz, and Example: Gives spoken information about the navi- AM wavebands — 530 to 1710 kHz in steps of 10 kHz. gation commands. (if so equipped) • HELP TAPE Example: • HELP CASSETTE Radio commands • TUNE NINETY SEVEN POINT NINE ț HELP CD [CHANGER/DJ] ț RADIO ON/OFF (97.9) Gives spoken information about the CD Turns the radio system on or off. • RADIO TUNE TEN FORTY AM player voice commands. (if so equipped) ț RADIO PLAY ț [RADIO] TUNE nametag, RADIO SELECT ț HELP AUDIO Turns the sound system on. Selects the nametag

4-43

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Selects the stored station with the nametag Turns to the waveband given in the com- and their nametags from the voice system given in the command. A total of 20 radio mand and selects the last station played. memory. nametags can be stored. Example: ț RADIO [PLAY] DIRECTORY Example: Gives a spoken list of station nametags • RADIO SELECT FM1 and frequencies currently stored in the • TUNE COUNTRY (nametag) • SELECT BAND AM voice system memory. • RADIO SELECT WDET (nametag) ț RADIO STORE [NAME] ț [RADIO] [TUNE/SELECT] Stores the currently selected station, with a Tape commands PRESET memory number, nametag, in the voice system memory. ț TAPE/CASSETTE ON/OFF AM/FM/FM1/FM2 PRESET memory When prompted, the chosen nametag must Starts or stops the cassette tape. number AM/FM/FM1/FM2 be spoken, and confirmed. A total of 20 ț TAPE/CASSETTE PLAY Selects the stored station corresponding to nametags can be stored. Selects the cassette tape player. Any tape the preset number (1 to 6) given in the The sound system must be in radio currently loaded will start to play. command. mode before giving the Radio Store ț [TAPE/CASSETTE] REVERSE/CHANGE Example: command. SIDES Reverses the direction of the cassette tape • TUNE PRESET ONE FM1 ț RADIO DELETE nametag being played. The other side of the tape is • RADIO SELECT PRESET THREE Deletes the station and nametag corre- played from the current position of the AM sponding to the nametag given in the tape. • PRESET ONE FM1 command from the voice system memory. Example: ț [RADIO] [SELECT] [BAND] AM/FM/FM1/ ț RADIO DELETE DIRECTORY FM2 Deletes all currently stored radio stations • TAPE REVERSE

4-44

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

• CASSETTE CHANGE SIDES ț [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] NEXT/PREVIOUS [TONE] TREBLE UP/DOWN DISC/CD Increases or decreases the treble level by 1 ț [TAPE/CASSETTE] REWIND [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] DISC/CD UP/DOWN step. Selects the Rewind mode. Selects disc up or down. ț [TAPE/CASSETTE] FAST FORWARD Automatic climate control com- ț [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] NEXT/PREVIOUS Selects the Fast Forward mode. mands TRACK ț [CLIMATE/CLIMATE CONTROL] AUTO- ț TAPE/CASSETTE SEEK/SEARCH [UP]/ [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] TRACK UP/DOWN MATIC [ON] DOWN Selects track up or down. Turns on the climate control system in Seeks up or down the tape until the next ț [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] PROGRAM automatic mode. track. Selects normal, 1 disc repeat, 1 track ț CLIMATE-[CONTROL]-[SELECT]/ ț [TAPE/CASSETTE] DOLBY ON/OFF repeat, 1 disc random and all discs ran- [SELECT]-TEMPERATURE/CLIMATE- Selects Dolby on or off. dom in turns. [CONTROL]-[SELECT]-TEMPERATURE CD⅐DJ commands (if so Audio commands temperature [DEGREES] equipped) Set the climate control temperature to the ț AUDIO ON/OFF ț CD [CHANGER/DJ] ON/OFF Turn the sound system on or off. value given in the command. Starts or stops the CD player. ț [AUDIO/RADIO/TAPE/CD (CHANGER/DJ)] Example: ț CD [CHANGER/DJ] PLAY [TONE] BASS UP/DOWN • CLIMATE 74 (seventy four) Selects the CD player, with settings cor- Increases or decreases the bass level by 1 • SELECT TEMPERATURE 74 responding to the last CD and track to be step. FAHRENHEIT played. ț [AUDIO/RADIO/TAPE/CD (CHANGER/DJ)] • CLIMATE TEMPERATURE 74

4-45

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

ț [CLIMATE]/[CLIMATE CONTROL] TEM- Example: of commands, the users can create a voice PERATURE UP/DOWN model of their own voice that is stored in the • CLIMATE DUAL Increases or decreases the temperature setting VACS. The VACS is capable of storing two • CLIMATE CONTROL OFF by 1 degree. different speaker adaptation models in the Display commands memory location A/B. Example: ț [DISPLAY] [SHOW] PREVIOUS [SCREEN] If memory A is available, the VACS will use • CLIMATE TEMPERATURE UP Turns the display to the previous display. memory A to store the model. If memory A is • CLIMATE TEMPERATURE DOWN Example: in use and memory B is available, the VACS ț CLIMATE [CONTROL] ON/OFF will use memory B to store the model. If both • Turns the climate control system on or off. PREVIOUS of the memory locations are in use, the VACS • DISPLAY PREVIOUS ț will ask user to select which memory location [CLIMATE]/[CLIMATE CONTROL] • PREVIOUS SCREEN DEFROST/DEFOG [ON]/OFF should be overwritten. Navigation commands (if so Turns the defrost or defog system on or Training procedure off. equipped) The procedure for training a voice is as Refer to the separate Navigation Owner’s Example: Manual. follows. • CLIMATE CONTROL DEFOG 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet • CLIMATE DEFROST OFF SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE outdoor location. ț CLIMATE [CONTROL] DUAL [ON]/OFF Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of- 2. Sit in the driving seat with the engine Turns dual mode or balance mode on or dialect users to train the system to improve running, the parking brake on, and the off. recognition accuracy. By repeating a number transmission in Park.

4-46

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

3. Press and hold the PTT button for 3 ț When the PTT button is pressed for more ț telephone store zero five four four six seconds. The display shows ENTERING than 3 seconds in the SA mode ț map route guidance off TRAINING. ț When the vehicle is driven during the SA ț CD changer tone bass down 4. Voice memory A or B is selected automati- mode cally. At this time, “TRAINING MODE ț tune fourteen ten AM ț When the key is turned to OFF VOICE A or B” is displayed. ț navigation cancel route guidance Training phrase 5. When preparation is complete, press the ț telephone dial memory ninety eight PTT button. During the SA mode, the VACS instructs the ț cassette Dolby on 6. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the trainer to say the following phrases. (The instructions. timing of input phrases is indicated by the ț display show previous screen VACS.) 7. When the training is finished, “RECORD- ț temperature thirty three point zero degrees ț ING COMPLETE” will be displayed. temperature eighteen point five degrees ț CDDJ tone treble up ț 8. “PLEASE SAY YOUR NAME” will then be phone dial memory nineteen ț navigation save present position displayed. Follow the instructions and ț audio tone treble up register your name. ț map where am I ț tune seventeen hundred and ten 9. When the registered name is confirmed, ț select a hundred and seven point nine FM ț phone enter three zero seven two nine “TRAINING COMPLETE” will be displayed, ț tape fast forward thereby completing the SA mode. ț radio select hundred and five point one FM ț telephone enter star zero eight eight nine 10.The SA mode will stop if any of the ț climate control twenty two point oh de- following operations is carried out. grees ț select thirteen hundred fifty AM

4-47

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

ț map store current location ț CD changer disc down ț radio twelve eighty AM ț navigation show next intersection ț climate control defrost on ț tune eleven sixty AM ț enter pound nine oh zero one ț CDDJ play ț phone delete directory ț cassette change sides ț radio sixteen forty AM ț tune fifteen hundred seventy ț map voice mute off ț show bird view ț navigation go home ț map zoom in ț radio select preset one FM two

4-48

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MONITOR, CLIMATE, AUDIO AND VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEMS

TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved. Symptom Remedy Displays “COMMAND NOT 1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see Command list in this section. RECOGNIZED” or the system 2. Ensure that the command is given after the tone while “LISTENING” is displayed. fails to interpret the command correctly. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on. NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place. 6. If a number of commands have been given in rapid succession resulting in the message “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” to be displayed, then allow the system to recover (approximately one minute) before trying the command again. 7. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. Displays “NO SPEECH DE- 1. Ensure that the command is given after the tone while “LISTENING” is displayed. TECTED”. 2. Ensure that the command is given within a maximum of five seconds from the end of the tone. NOTE: Be sure you know what to say before pressing the Voice button. Displays “NAMETAG NOT 1. This response will be received when storing a nametag if the nametag being given has already been stored. UNIQUE”. This can be confirmed by giving the Radio Directory of Phone Directory command. 2. If this response is received and the nametag has not been used already, then it is too similar to an existing nametag or voice grammar and an alternative should be used. The system consistently selects 1. Ensure that the nametag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the the wrong nametag. Radio Directory or Phone Directory command. 2. Delete one of the nametags being confused and replace it with a different nametag.

4-49

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 5 STARTING AND DRIVING

Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-2 Intelligent cruise control system (if so Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)...... 5-2 equipped)...... 5-18 Three way catalyst ...... 5-3 Driving with intelligent cruise control Low tire pressure warning system ...... 5-4 system...... 5-21 Avoiding collision and rollover...... 5-6 Intelligent cruise control switch...... 5-24 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...... 5-6 Intelligent cruise control system Ignition switch ...... 5-6 display...... 5-24 Automatic transmission ...... 5-7 Operating the intelligent cruise control Key positions...... 5-8 system...... 5-25 Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 5-8 How to change the set vehicle Before starting the engine...... 5-9 speed...... 5-28 Starting the engine...... 5-9 How to change the set distance to the ve- Driving the vehicle...... 5-10 hicle ahead ...... 5-28 Automatic transmission ...... 5-10 Approach warning ...... 5-29 Parking brake...... 5-16 Automatic cancellation...... 5-30 Cruise control (ASCD) ...... 5-16 Warning indicator...... 5-31 Precautions on cruise control...... 5-16 How to handle the sensor...... 5-32 Break-in schedule ...... 5-32 Cruise control operations...... 5-17 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-33

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ Parking/parking on hills...... 5-34 Battery...... 5-40 Power steering...... 5-35 Draining of coolant water ...... 5-40 Active damper suspension (if so Cold weather driving ...... 5-41 equipped)...... 5-35 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-41 Brake system ...... 5-36 Anti-freeze ...... 5-41 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)...... 5-36 Battery...... 5-41 Vehicle dynamics control system Tire equipment ...... 5-41 (VDC) ...... 5-38 Special winter equipment...... 5-42 Cold weather driving ...... 5-40 Driving on snow or ice ...... 5-42 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-40 Engine block heater (if so equipped)... 5-43 Anti-freeze ...... 5-40

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

PRECAUTIONS WHEN closed, when not in use, and ț Do not run the engine in closed STARTING AND DRIVING prevent children’s access to car spaces such as a garage. keys. ț Do not park the vehicle with the WARNING engine running for any extended length of time. ț Do not leave children, impaired EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monox- adults, or pets alone in your ve- ide) ț Keep the trunk lid closed while hicle. They could accidentally in- driving, otherwise exhaust gases jure themselves or others through WARNING could be drawn into the passen- inadvertent operation of the ve- ger compartment. If you must hicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, Do not breathe exhaust gases; they drive with the trunk lid open fol- temperatures in a closed vehicle contain colorless and odorless car- low these precautions: could quickly become high enough bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is 1. Open all the windows. to cause severe or possibly fatal dangerous. It can cause uncon- injuries to people or animals. sciousness or death. 2. Set the air recirculation switch to off and the fan con- ț Closely supervise children when ț If you suspect that exhaust fumes trol at 4 (high) to circulate they are around cars to prevent are entering the vehicle, drive the air. them from playing and becoming with all windows fully open, and Be sure the rear seat armrest locked in the trunk where they have the vehicle inspected and tray are closed. could be seriously injured. Keep immediately. ț the car locked, with the trunk If the electrical wiring or other

5-2

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

cable connections must be routed vice. to a trailer through the seal on the WARNING b. You suspect that exhaust trunk lid or the body, follow the fumes are entering into the ț manufacturer’s recommendation The exhaust gas and the exhaust passenger compartment. to prevent carbon monoxide entry system are very hot. Keep people, into the vehicle. c. You notice a change in the animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system ț sound of the exhaust system. If a special body or other equip- components. ment is added for recreational or d. You have had an accident in- ț other usage, follow the manufac- volving damage to the exhaust Do not stop or park the vehicle turer’s recommendation to pre- system, underbody, or rear of over flammable materials such as vent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. dry grass, waste paper or rags. the vehicle. (Some recreational They may ignite and cause a fire. vehicle appliances such as THREE WAY CATALYST stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. The three way catalyst is an emission control may also generate carbon monox- CAUTION device installed in the exhaust system. Ex- ide.) haust gases in the three way catalyst are ț Do not use leaded gasoline. ț The exhaust system and body burned at high temperatures to help reduce Deposits from leaded gasoline se- should be inspected by a quali- pollutants. riously reduce the three way cata- fied mechanic whenever: lyst ability to help reduce exhaust a. The vehicle is raised for ser- pollutants.

5-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARN- for tire pressure monitor. ț Keep your engine tuned up. Mal- ING SYSTEM functions in the ignition, fuel in- FLAT TIRE warning This vehicle is equipped with the low tire jection, or electrical systems can If the vehicle is being driven with a flat tire or pressure warning system, which displays cause overrich fuel flow into the extremely low tire pressure (lower than 27 psi, pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on three way catalyst, causing it to 190 kPa), the FLAT TIRE warning message the monitor screen by sending a signal from a overheat. Do not keep driving if will be displayed on the monitor screen. The sensor that is installed in each wheel. the engine misfires, or if notice- low tire pressure warning light comes on, and able loss of performance or other The low tire pressure warning system will the chime sounds for about 10 seconds. unusual operating conditions are activate only when the vehicle is driven at detected. Have the vehicle in- speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, this spected promptly by an autho- WARNING system may not detect a sudden drop in tire rized INFINITI retailer. pressure (for example, a flat tire while driv- ț If the low tire pressure warning ț Avoid driving with an extremely ing). light comes on or FLAT TIRE warn- low fuel level. Running out of fuel ing is displayed on the monitor could cause the engine to misfire, Frequently check the tire pressure information screen while driving, avoid sud- damaging the three way catalyst. display on the monitor screen and adjust pressure of each tire properly. (The order of den steering maneuvers or abrupt ț Do not race the engine while the tire pressure figures displayed on the braking, reduce vehicle speed, warming it up. screen does not correspond with the actual pull off the road to a safe location order of the tire position.) See “Vehicle and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage information” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems” section

5-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

could occur and may lead to an cautions about run-flat tires. Fail- windows. This may cause poor re- accident and could result in seri- ure to do so may result in a ception of the signals from the tire ous personal injury. Check the serious accident. pressure sensors, and the low tire pressure for all four tires and pressure warning system will not ț When a spare tire is mounted or a adjust the pressure to the COLD function properly. wheel is replaced, tire pressure tire pressure shown on the tire will not be indicated and the low placard. If you have a flat tire, tire pressure warning system will FCC Notice: replace it with a spare tire as not function. Contact your Changes or modifications not expressly soon as possible. (See “Flat tire” INFINITI retailer as soon as pos- approved by the manufacturer compli- in the “6. In case of emergency” sible for tire replacement and/or ance could void the user’s authority to section for changing a flat tire.) system resetting. operate the equipment. ț If your vehicle is equipped with ț Do not inject any tire liquid or This device complies with Part 15 of the run-flat tires, you can continue aerosol tire sealant into the tires, FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry driving after you have a flat tire. as this may cause a malfunction Canada. However, remember that vehicle of the tire pressure sensors. handling stability is reduced, Operation is subject to the following two which could lead to an accident conditions: (1) This device may not and personal injury. See “Wheels CAUTION cause harmful interference, and (2) this and tires” in the “8. Do-it- device must accept any interference re- yourself” section for more details Do not place metalized film or any ceived, including interference that may and make sure to observe the metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the cause undesired operation of the device.

5-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

AVOIDING COLLISION AND drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always INFINITI is committed to safe driving. You ROLLOVER wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Seat must not drive under the influence of alcohol. belts” section of this manual, and also instruct Every year thousands of people are injured or WARNING your passengers to do so. killed in alcohol related accidents. Although DRINKING ALCOHOL/ the local laws vary on what is considered to be Failure to operate this vehicle in a DRUGS AND DRIVING legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol safe and prudent manner may result affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. in loss of control or an accident. WARNING Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive Never drive under the influence of al- And that’s true for drugs too (over the counter, speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steer- cohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood- prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if ing maneuvers, because these driving prac- stream reduces coordination, delays your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired tices could cause you to lose control of your reaction time and impairs judge- by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of ment. Driving after drinking alcohol condition. control could result in a collision with increases the likelihood of being in- other vehicles or objects, or cause the volved in an accident injuring your- IGNITION SWITCH vehicle to rollover, particularly if the self and others. Additionally, if you loss of control causes the vehicle to are injured in the accident, alcohol WARNING slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, can increase the severity of the and avoid driving when tired. Never drive injury. Never remove or turn the key to the when under the influence of alcohol or drugs LOCK position while driving. The (including prescription or over-the-counter

5-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

The ignition lock is designed so that the key the select lever cannot be moved from P steering wheel will lock. This may cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until (Park). The selector lever can be moved cause the driver to lose control of the the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) if the ignition switch is in the ON vehicle and could result in serious position. position and the foot brake pedal is vehicle damage and/or personal in- depressed. jury. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) To lock the steering wheel, remove the position. key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION the key and turn it gently while rotating If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park), the steering wheel slightly right and left. the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. Emergency release steering lock When the key cannot be turned toward the When the battery is discharged, the steering LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove lock may not be released. Proceed as follows the key: to release the steering lock. 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) 1. Remove the emergency key from the elec- position. tronic ignition key. See “How to use the SIS0102 2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON emergency key” in the “Pre-driving and direction. adjustments” section. The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock 2. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the device. 3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position. emergency key deeply and turn it gently 4. Remove the key. The key can only be removed when the while rotating the steering wheel slightly ignition switch is in this LOCK position. If the key is removed from the ignition switch, right and left.

5-7

੬ 02.11.18/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

KEY POSITIONS This position activates the starter motor, ࠗ1 If metal contacts the electronic ignition starting the engine. key. LOCK Normal parking position (0) ࠗ2 If a device equipped with a transponder OFF (1) INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBI- LIZER SYSTEM contacts the electronic ignition key. The engine can be turned off without locking The Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System will If the engine fails to start using the registered the steering wheel. not allow the engine to start without the use of electronic ignition key (for example, when The ignition lock is designed so that the key the registered Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- interference is caused by another electronic cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until tem key (hereafter “Electronic ignition key”). ignition key, an automated toll road device or the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) The engine may not start with the registered automated payment device on the key ring), position. electronic ignition key under the following restart the engine using the following proce- ACC (Accessories) (2) conditions: dures: This position activates electrical accessories 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi- such as the radio when the engine is not tion for approximately 5 seconds. running. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or ON Normal operating position (3) LOCK position, and wait approximately 5 seconds. This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2. START (4) 4. Restart the engine while holding the device SIP0281 (which may have caused the interference)

5-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

separate from the registered electronic ț Adjust inside and outside mirrors. ing, depress the accelerator pedal a ignition key. little (approximately 1/5 to the floor) ț Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to and hold it then crank the engine. Re- If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI do likewise. lease the key and the accelerator pedal recommends placing the registered electronic ț Check the operation of warning lights when the engine starts. ignition key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other transponder equipped when key is turned to the ON (3) position. ț If the engine is very hard to start devices. STARTING THE ENGINE because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the BEFORE STARTING THE EN- 1. Apply the parking brake. floor and hold it. Crank the engine for GINE 2. Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the ț Make sure the area around the vehicle is (Neutral). (P preferred.) engine, release the accelerator pedal. clear. Crank the engine with your foot off The starter is designed not to operate if ț Maintenance items listed here should be the accelerator pedal by turning the the selector lever is in one of the driving checked periodically, for example each ignition key to START. Release the positions. time you check engine oil. key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat ț Check that all windows and lights are 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the the above procedure. clean. accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the en- ț Visually inspect tires for condition. Also gine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to check tire pressure. run, repeat the above procedure. ț Lock all doors. ț If the engine is very hard to start in ex- ț Position seat and adjust head restraints. tremely cold weather or when restart-

5-9

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

DRIVING THE VEHICLE CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Do not operate the starter for more Gate type shift with manual than 15 seconds at a time. If the en- mode gine does not start, turn the key off The automatic transmission in your vehicle is and wait 10 seconds before cranking electronically controlled by a transmission again, otherwise the starter could be control module to produce maximum power damaged. and smooth operation. 4. Warm-up Shown on the following pages are the recom- Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 mended operating procedures for this trans- seconds after starting. Drive at moderate mission. Follow these procedures for maxi- speed for a short distance first, especially mum vehicle performance and driving in cold weather. enjoyment. Starting the vehicle

SIS0062

5-10

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

ț After starting the engine, fully depress the accident. foot brake pedal before shifting the selector WARNING lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D ț On slippery roads, do not down- (Drive) or manual shift mode position. Be ț Do not depress the accelerator shift. This may cause a loss of sure the vehicle is fully stopped before at- pedal while shifting from P (Park) control. tempting to shift the selector lever. or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D This automatic transmission is de- (Drive) or manual shift mode. Al- signed so that the foot brake pedal ways depress the brake pedal until CAUTION MUST be depressed before shifting from shifting is completed. Failure to P (Park) to any drive position while the do so could cause you to lose con- When stopping the vehicle on an up- ignition switch is ON. trol and have an accident. hill grade, do not hold the vehicle by ț Cold engine idle speed is high, so depressing the accelerator pedal. The selector lever cannot be moved out use caution when shifting into a The foot brakes should be used for of P (Park) and into any of the other gear forward or reverse gear before this purpose. positions if the ignition key is turned to the engine has warmed up. the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch. ț Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re- verse) while vehicle is moving 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and forward. Never shift to P (Park) or shift the selector lever into a driving gear. D (Drive) while vehicle is moving 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, rearward. These could cause an then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

5-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

Shifting is in the N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) so could cause the vehicle to move position. unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or prop- 4. If necessary, move the selector lever to P erty damage. (Park) or N (Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is preferred) or move the selector lever to P (Park) to park the vehicle. If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N 5. Turn the ignition key to LOCK to remove (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the key the key. cannot be turned to LOCK and be removed SIS0063 from the ignition switch. Additionally, the After starting the engine, fully depress the selector lever cannot be moved to P (Park) brake pedal and shift the selector lever from P from N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) position. (Park) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Manual shift The selector lever can be moved from R mode or any of the desired shift positions. (Reverse) to P (Park) with the key in the OFF or ACC position. If this occurs, perform the WARNING following steps: 1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle SIS0064 Apply the parking brake if the selec- is stopped. P (Park): tor lever is in any position while the 2. Turn the key to ON. engine is not running. Failure to do Use this selector position when the vehicle is 3. Depress the foot brake pedal if the vehicle parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

5-12

੬ 02.11.18/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING the vehicle is completely stopped. For maxi- be depressed to move the selector lever mum safety, depress the brake pedal, then from P (Park), N (Neutral), or any drive ally opposite than when viewed in move the lever to the P (Park) position. The position to R (Reverse). the rear view and outside mirrors. brake pedal must be depressed any time ț Rear view monitor (if so equipped) Do not put anything on the rear the selector lever is moved to P (Park). view camera. The rear view cam- When the selector lever is shifted into the R Apply the parking brake. When parking on a era is installed beside the license (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the plate light. a rear view of the vehicle. lever to the P (Park) position. N (Neutral): WARNING Neither forward or reverse gear is engaged. ț The rear view camera is a conve- The engine can be started in this position. nience but it is not a substitute for You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a proper backing or lane changing stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. procedures. Always turn and D (Drive): check that it is safe to do so before backing up or changing lanes. Use this position for all normal forward SIS0065 ț Objects viewed in the rear view driving. R (Reverse): monitor differ from actual dis- Manual shift mode tance because a wide angle lens Use this position to back up. Always be sure When the selector lever is shifted from D to is used. Objects will appear visu- the vehicle is completely stopped when se- the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped lecting R (Reverse). The brake pedal must or while driving, the transmission enters the

5-13

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be M1 (First): ț Moving the selector lever rapidly to the selected manually. same side twice will shift the ranges in Use this position when climbing steep hills succession. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, displayed on the position indicator in the meter. sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking When canceling the manual shift When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift on steep downhill grades. mode: gate, the position indicator first displays M4 ț Remember not to drive at high speeds for Return the selector lever to the D position to (Fourth) return the transmission to the normal driving extended periods of time in lower than M4 mode. Shift ranges up or down one by one as range. This reduces fuel economy. follows: ț In the manual shift mode, the trans- When shifting up: → → → → mission may not shift to the selected M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 ← ← ← ← Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. gear. This helps maintain driving M5 (Fifth): (Shifts to higher range.) performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control. Use this position for all normal forward driving. When shifting down: ț In the manual shift mode, the trans- M4 (Fourth): Move the selector lever to the − (down) side. mission may shift up automatically to For driving up or down long slopes where (Shifts to lower range.) a higher range than selected if the engine braking would be advantageous. ț The transmission will automatically shift engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the trans- M3 (Third) and M2 (Second): the gears between the 1st and the selected range. (For example, if you select the 3rd mission automatically shifts down Use for hill climbing or engine braking on range, the transmission will shift up or and shifts to 1st gear before the ve- down hill grades. down between the 1st and 3rd gears.) hicle comes to a stop.

5-14

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

Shift lock release may not be moved to the R (Reverse) position stances please note that the gears in the form N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) position. To automatic transmission will be locked in 4th park the vehicle, push the shift lock release gear. button and move the shift lever to P (Park) If the vehicle is driven under extreme con- through R (Reverse). ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe have your INFINITI retailer check the auto- system may be activated. This will occur matic transmission system as soon as pos- even if all electrical circuits are function- sible. ing properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn SIS0066 Accelerator downshift the key back to the ON position. The ve- — In D position — If the battery is discharged, the selector lever hicle should return to its normal operating may not be moved from the P (Park) position For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the condition. If it does not return to its normal accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the even with the brake pedal depressed. operating condition, have your INFINITI transmission down into a lower gear, depend- retailer check the transmission and repair To move the selector lever, push the shift lock ing on the vehicle speed. if necessary. release button. The selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral). This allows the vehicle Fail-safe to be moved if the battery is discharged. When the fail-safe operation occurs, the next time the key is turned to the ON position, the To push the shift lock release button, follow light will blink for approximately 8 the procedure as illustrated. seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. While If the battery is discharged, the selector lever the vehicle can be driven under these circum-

5-15

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL (ASCD) WARNING PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL ț Be sure the parking brake is fully ț If the cruise control system malfunctions, released before driving. Failure to it will cancel automatically. The SET indi- do so can cause brake failure and cator light in the meter assembly will then lead to an accident. blink to warn the driver. ț Do not release the parking brake ț If the engine coolant temperature becomes from outside the vehicle. excessively high, the cruise control system SIS0067 ț Do not use the gear shift in place will be canceled automatically. of the parking brake. When park- To apply: Fully depress the parking brake ț If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the ing, be sure the parking brake is pedal. cruise control main switch off and have the fully engaged. system checked by your INFINITI retailer. To release: ț Do not leave children unattended ț The SET indicator light may sometimes 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. in a vehicle. They could release blink when the cruise control main switch the parking brake and cause an 2. Depress the parking brake pedal and the is turned ON while pushing the accident. parking brake will be released. RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To 3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning properly set the cruise control system, per- light goes out. form the steps below in the order indicated.

5-16

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

CRUISE CONTROL OPERA- COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET WARNING TIONS indicator light will come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will Do not use the cruise control when maintain the set speed. driving under the following condi- ț To pass another vehicle, depress the tions: accelerator pedal. When you release the ț when it is not possible to keep the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previ- vehicle at set speed. ously set speed. ț in heavy traffic or in traffic that ț The vehicle may not maintain the set speed varies in speed. on winding or hilly roads. If this happens, SIS0068 drive without the cruise control. ț on winding or hilly roads. The cruise control allows driving at a speed ț on slippery roads (rain, snow, To cancel the preset speed, follow any of between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) ice, etc.) these methods: without keeping your foot on the accelerator a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indi- ț in very windy areas. pedal. cator light will go out. Doing so could cause a loss of ve- To turn on the cruise control, push the hicle control and result in an acci- b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator main switch on. The CRUISE indicator light light will go out. dent. will come on. c) Move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) To set cruising speed, accelerate your position. The SET indicator light will go vehicle to the desired speed, push the out.

5-17

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING d) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE ț Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCEL INTELLIGENT CRUISE CON- indicator and SET indicator lights will go set switch. Each time you do this, the set TROL SYSTEM (if so out. speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 equipped) km/h). ț If you depress the brake pedal while The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system pushing the RES/ACCEL or COAST/SET To reset at a slower cruising speed, use automatically maintains a selected distance switch and reset at the cruising speed, the one of the following methods: from the vehicle in front of you according to cruise control will disengage. Turn the ț Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the that vehicle’s speed, or at the set speed, if the main switch off once and then turn it on vehicle attains the desired speed, push the road ahead is clear. again. COAST/SET switch and release it. With ICC, the driver can maintain the same ț The cruise control will automatically can- ț Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. speed as other vehicles without the constant cel if the vehicle slows down below ap- Release the switch when the vehicle slows need to adjust the speed as you would with a proximately 8 MPH (13 km/h). down to the desired speed. normal cruise control system. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use ț Push, then quickly release the COAST/ The system is intended to enhance the opera- one of the following methods: SET switch. Each time you do this, the set tion of the vehicle when following another speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 ț vehicle traveling in the same lane and direc- Depress the accelerator pedal. When the km/h). vehicle attains the desired speed, push and tion. If the distance sensor detects a slower release the COAST/SET switch. To resume the preset speed, push and removing vehicle ahead of you, the system will lease the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle reduce your speed so that you follow the ț Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch. will resume the last set cruising speed when vehicle in front of you at the selected distance. When the vehicle attains the speed you the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). The system automatically controls the throttle desire, release the switch. and applies the brakes (up to 25% of vehicle

5-18

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING braking power) if necessary. The following items are controlled when the flowing traffic. Do not use the selector lever is in the D (Drive) position The detection range of the sensor is approxi- system on roads with sharp except in the manual shift mode. mately 390 ft (120 m) ahead. curves, or on icy roads, in heavy ț rain or in fog. When there are no vehicles ahead, the vehicle with this system maintains the WARNING speed set by the driver. The driver can set The distance sensor will not detect: the speed between approximately 25 and ț This system is only an aid to assist ț 90 MPH (40 and 144 km/h). the driver and is not a collision Stationary and slow moving vehicles ț warning or avoidance device. It is ț Pedestrians or objects in the roadway When there is a vehicle ahead, the ICC the driver’s responsibility to stay system changes vehicle speed between ț alert, drive safely and be in con- Oncoming vehicles in the same lane approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) and the trol of the vehicle at all times. ț Motorcycles or scooters traveling offset in set speed to match the speed of the vehicle ahead and maintain the driver selected ț the travel lane The system is primarily intended distance between vehicles. for use on straight, dry, open This system will not automatically brake ț roads with light traffic. It is not the vehicle to a stop. When the vehicle ahead disappears, the advisable to use the system in vehicle with this system accelerates up to city traffic or congested areas. The system will cancel and a warning buzzer and maintains the set speed. will sound if the speed falls below approxi- ț This system will not adapt auto- mately 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, the system matically to road conditions. This will be disengaged below the 20 MPH (32 system should be used in evenly km/h) cut-off speed or over the maximum set speed.

5-19

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

the vehicle. If the vehicle speed fog, snow, etc.) WARNING falls below approximately 20 (When the windshield wiper MPH (32 km/h), the Intelligent is operated at the low speed ț As there is a performance limit to Cruise Control system is auto- (LO), high speed (HI) posi- the distance control function, matically canceled and a warning tions or the fastest position of never rely solely on the Intelligent buzzer sounds. (The brake control intermittent operation, the Cruise Control system. This sys- is also canceled.) Intelligent Cruise Control tem does not correct careless, in- system is automatically can- ț The system may not detect the attentive or absent-minded driv- celed.) ing, or overcome poor visibility in vehicle in front of you in certain rain, fog, or other bad weather. road or weather conditions. To — When strong light (for ex- Decelerate the vehicle speed by avoid accidents, never use the ample, at sunrise or sunset) depressing the brake pedal, de- Intelligent Cruise Control system is directly shining on the pending on the distance to the ve- under the following conditions: front of the vehicle. hicle ahead and the surrounding — On roads where the traffic is — When rain, snow or dirt ad- circumstances in order to main- heavy or there are sharp here to the system sensor. tain a safe distance between ve- curves — On steep downhill roads (the hicles. — On slippery road surfaces vehicle may go beyond the ț Although the brake operation is such as on ice or snow, etc. set vehicle speed and fre- controlled by the system, the sys- quent braking may result in — During bad weather (rain, tem does not automatically stop overheating the brakes).

5-20

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

Always pay attention to the operation of the smoke) from other vehicles reduces the — On repeated uphill and down- vehicle and be ready to manually control the sensor’s visibility. hill roads. proper following distance. The Intelligent ț if the reflector on the vehicle ahead is Cruise Control (ICC) system may not be able — When traffic conditions make missing, damaged or covered. it difficult to keep a proper to maintain the selected distance between distance between vehicles vehicles (following distance) or selected ve- ț if excessively heavy baggage is loaded in because of frequent accel- hicle speed under some circumstances. the rear seat or the trunk of your vehicle. eration or deceleration. The ICC system uses a sensor located on the The ICC system is designed to automatically front of the vehicle to detect vehicles ahead. detect when the sensor is dirty or obstructed. DRIVING WITH INTELLIGENT The sensor mainly detects the signals returned If dirt is detected on the sensor, the system is CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM from the reflectors on a vehicle ahead. The automatically canceled. If the sensor is cov- ICC system may not be able to maintain the ered with ice, a transparent or translucent selected distance if the sensor cannot detect vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect the reflector from the vehicle ahead when: them. If so, the ICC system may not cancel ț the reflector is positioned high on the and may not be able to maintain the selected vehicle (trailer, etc.). following distance. Clean the sensor regularly. ț the reflector is covered with dirt, snow and The ICC system is designed to maintain a road spray. selected distance and match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead; the system decelerates ț snow or road spray from other vehicles the vehicle as necessary. However, the ICC SIS0087 reduces the sensor’s visibility. system can only apply up to 25% of the ț dense exhaust or other smoke (black vehicles total braking power. Because of this,

5-21

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING the ICC system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the lane ahead or if a vehicle ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.

If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a SIS0096 warning buzzer and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action. The detection zone of the ICC sensor is the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may Refer to “Approach warning” later in this limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the warn you by blinking the system indicator and section. detection zone for the ICC to maintain the sounding the buzzer. The driver may have to selected distance and to match the speed of a manually control the proper following dis- The ICC system does not control vehicle vehicle ahead. tance. speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must A vehicle ahead may be outside the detection pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain zone due to its position in the lane. Motor- proper distance from vehicles ahead when cycles and scooters may not be detected in the approaching toll gates or traffic jams. lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is changing lanes ahead may be outside the detection zone until it is almost completely in

5-22

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

SIS0097 SIS0098

When driving on some roads, the ICC sensor warn you unexpectedly. You will then have to If you are driving on the freeway at a set speed may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may manually control the proper distance ahead of and come upon a slower vehicle ahead, the temporarily not detect a vehicle ahead. This your vehicle. ICC will attempt to match that vehicle’s speed may cause the ICC system to decelerate or and maintain a selected following distance. If accelerate the vehicle. These conditions could the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the happen on winding roads, hilly roads, enter- freeway, the ICC system will accelerate the ing or exiting a curve, narrow roads or in road vehicle to match the set speed. Pay attention construction areas. Additionally, the detection to the driving operation to maintain control of of vehicles can be affected by vehicle opera- the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed. tion (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or vehicle condition (for example, if The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on a vehicle is being driven with some damage). winding or hilly roads. If this happens, drive The ICC system indicator and buzzer may without the ICC system.

5-23

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CON- Resumes set speed or increases speed INTELLIGENT CRUISE CON- TROL SWITCH incrementally. TROL SYSTEM DISPLAY 4. CANCEL switch: The display is located under the speedometer. Deactivates system without erasing set speed. 5. DISTANCE switch: Changes the following distance from; Maximum, Intermediate, Minimum.

SIS0069

The system is operated by a master ON/OFF SIS0079 switch and four control switches, all mounted 1. Intelligent Cruise Control system warning on the steering wheel. light (Orange) 1. ON/OFF switch: The light comes on if there is a malfunction in Master switch to activate the system the ICC system. 2. COAST/SET switch: 2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed incrementally. Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you. 3. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch:

5-24

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

3. Set distance indicator To turn on the cruise control, push the ON/OFF switch on. The cruise indicator light, Displays the selected distance between ve- set distance indicator and set vehicle speed in- hicles set with the DISTANCE switch. dicator come on, and they are on a standby 4. Indicates your vehicle state for setting. 5. ON/OFF switch indicator light (White) Indicates that the ON/OFF switch is ON.

6. Set vehicle speed indicator SIS0080

Indicates the set vehicle speed. OPERATING INTELLIGENT For Canadian models, the speed will be CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM indicated by km/h.

When the key switch is turned ON, the display SIS0082 comes on as follows to check for a burned-out bulb, and it turns off when the engine is To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- started. hicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. (Vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on.)

SIS0081 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

5-25

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

The Intelligent Cruise Control system cannot System operation be set under the following conditions even if the COAST/SET switch is pushed. ț When traveling outside the 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) speed range ț When the selector lever is not in the D (Drive) position including the manual shift mode ț When the Vehicle Dynamics Control (VDC) system is switched off SIS0085 ț While the vehicle is being braked by the erate your vehicle when acceleration driver WARNING is required for a lane change or when ț When pressing the ACCEL/RES switch deceleration is required to maintain without there being a set speed in memory Normally when controlling the dis- a safe distance to the vehicle ahead tance to a vehicle ahead, this system ț When the windshield wipers are switched due to its sudden deceleration or if a automatically accelerates or decel- to High, Low or the fastest position of vehicle cuts in. erates your vehicle according to the intermittent operation. speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress ț When the parking brake is applied. the accelerator or brake pedal, how- The driver sets the desired vehicle speed ever, to properly accelerate or decel- based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to

5-26

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- is detected in the lane ahead. You may get your foot caught in the celerator pedal and steer the vehicle around the pedal. The ICC system displays the set speed. vehicle ahead. The system can be overridden by the driver. The set speed indicator will blink Vehicle detected ahead: When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC The vehicle detect indicator will turn off if the the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by system will also display the set speed and area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the controlling the throttle and applying the selected distance. pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle previously set speed. ahead. The system then controls the vehicle Vehicle ahead not detected: speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead When a vehicle is not longer detected ahead, to maintain a driver selected distance. the ICC system gradually accelerates your The stoplights of the vehicle come on vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle and the brake pedal depresses when speed. The ICC system then maintains the set braking is performed by the ICC system. speed. When a vehicle is no longer detected the CAUTION vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration SIS0084 Never place your foot under the brake to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC Although your vehicle may be at the set pedal. When the brake is operated by system is in operation, the system recontrols the Intelligent Cruise Control system. vehicle speed based on ICC system control, the distance to the vehicle. depress the accelerator pedal when it is

5-27

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly. mately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada). hicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). HOW TO CHANGE THE SET ț Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES HOW TO CHANGE THE SET VEHICLE SPEED switch. Each time you do this, the set DISTANCE TO THE VEHICLE speed will increase by approximately 1 To cancel the preset speed, use any of AHEAD MPH (1 km/h for Canada). these methods: The distance to the vehicle ahead can be To reset at a slower cruising speed, use selected at any time depending on the traffic ț Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle one of the following methods: conditions. speed indicator will go out. ț Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the Each time the DISTANCE switch is pressed, ț Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed vehicle attains the desired speed, push the the set distance will change to long, medium, indicator will go out. COAST/SET switch and release it. short and back to long again in that sequence. ț Turn the ON/OFF switch off. Both the ț Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. The ON/OFF switch indicator and set vehicle set vehicle speed will decrease by approxi- speed indicator will go out. mately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada). To reset at a faster cruising speed, use ț Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET one of the following methods: switch. Each time you do this, the set ț Depress the accelerator pedal. When the speed will decrease by approximately 1 vehicle attains the desired speed, push and MPH (1 km/h for Canada). release the COAST/SET switch. To resume the preset speed, push and re- SIS0076 ț Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. The lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle will set vehicle speed will increase by approxi- resume the last set cruising speed when the ve-

5-28

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

becomes “long”. (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes long.) APPROACH WARNING If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to large deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the buzzer and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if: • The buzzer sounds. • The vehicle ahead detection and set distance indicators blink.

WARNING

SIS0086 Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Con- trol system when traffic conditions ț The distance to the vehicle ahead will The higher the vehicle speed, the longer cause the buzzer to sound frequently. change according to the vehicle speed. the distance. ț If the engine is stopped, the set distance The warning buzzer may not sound in some

5-29

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING cases when there is a short distance between sensor may detect these reflectors when the AUTOMATIC CANCELLATION vehicle is driven on winding roads, hilly roads vehicles. Some examples are: A buzzer sounds under the following condi- or when entering or exiting a curve. The ICC ț When the vehicles are traveling at the tions and the control is automatically can- sensor may also detect reflectors on narrow same speed and the distance between celed. roads or in road construction zones. In these vehicles is not changing. cases you will have to manually control the ț When the vehicle speed is outside 20 to 90 ț When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster proper distance ahead of your vehicle. Also, MPH (32 to 144 km/h) and the distance between vehicles is in- the sensor sensitivity can be affected by the ț When the selector lever is shifted to a creasing. vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driv- position other than D (Drive) including the ing position in the lane) or vehicle condition ț manual shift mode When the accelerator pedal is depressed, (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with ț overriding the system. some damage). When the wiper is operated at low speed (LO), high speed (HI) or the fastest posi- ț When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. tion of intermittent operation The warning buzzer will not sound when your ț When the parking brake is applied vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or moving slowly. ț When the VDC is turned off The approach warning chime may sound and ț When the VDC operates the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects some reflectors which are fitted on vehicles in other lane or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to SIS0101 decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC

5-30

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING INDICATOR ț When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is di- When the sensor window is dirty, making it rectly shining on the front of the vehicle impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the ICC Condition A system is automatically canceled. Action to take The buzzer sounds and the system warning When the conditions listed above are no light (Orange) will come on and the set longer present, turn the system off using the distance indicators will blink. Intelligent Cruise Control ON/OFF Switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the Action to take system. If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle Condition B in a safe place, turn the engine off. Clean the dirty parts with a soft cloth and then perform SIS0083 the settings again.

The buzzer sounds and the Intelligent Cruise Control system is canceled automatically in the conditions described below. Part of the system display will come on or blink, making it impossible to set. ț When the VDC is turned off SIS0090 ț When the VDC operates ț When a tire slips

5-31

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

Condition C is still driveable under normal condi- so as not to damage them. tions, have the vehicle checked at an au- ț Do not impact the areas around the sensor. thorized INFINITI retailer. Do not touch or disassemble the screw HOW TO HANDLE THE SEN- located on the sensor. Doing so could cause SOR failure or malfunction. If the sensor installation part is deformed due to an accident, contact an authorized INFINITI retailer. ț Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory SIS0099 near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction. When the ICC system is not operating properly, the buzzer sounds and the system warn- BREAK-IN SCHEDULE ing light (Orange) will come on. During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow SIS0087 these recommendations to obtain maximum Action to take engine performance and ensure the future re- The sensor for the ICC system is located If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle liability and economy of your new vehicle. Fail- below the front bumper. in a safe place. Turn the engine off and then ure to follow these recommendations may re- perform the settings again. To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sult in shortened engine life and reduced ensure to observe the following: If it is not possible to set or the indicator gine performance. stays on, it may indicate that the system ț Always keep the sensor clean. ț Avoid driving for long periods at constant is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle Wipe dirty parts with a soft cloth carefully speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

5-32

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

engine over 4,000 rpm. ț Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine idling. ț Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. ț Keep your engine tuned up. ț Avoid quick starts. ț Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. ț Avoid hard braking as much as possible. ț Keep the tires inflated at the correct pres- ț Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles sure. Improper tire pressure will increase (805 km). wear and waste fuel. INCREASING FUEL ț Make sure the front wheels are properly ECONOMY aligned. Improper alignment will cause premature tire wear and lower fuel ț Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain economy. cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. ț Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only ț Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. when necessary. ț Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. ț When cruising at highway speeds, it is Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles. more economical to use the air conditioner ț Select a gear range suitable to road con- and leave the windows closed to reduce ditions. drag.

5-33

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS WARNING

ț Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. ț ISD001 Make sure the automatic transmission selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go while the vehicle is unattended. WARNING and cannot be moved without de- ț Never leave children unattended pressing the foot brake pedal. ț Do not stop or park the vehicle in the vehicle. over flammable materials such as 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling dry grass, waste paper or rags. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. into the street when parked on a sloping They may ignite and cause a fire. drive way, it is a good practice to turn the 2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) ț wheels as illustrated. Never leave the engine running position. ț HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: ࠗ1

5-34

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

Turn the wheels into the curb and move you will still have control of the vehicle. The damping force of the shock absorbers can the vehicle forward until the curb side However, much greater steering effort is be adjusted to the level you desire. Set the wheel gently touches the curb. needed, especially in sharp turns or at low switch to the position you desire while the speeds. ignition switch is ON. ț HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: ࠗ2 Set the switch to the AUTO position for normal Turn the wheels away from the curb and WARNING driving. The damping force will automatically move the vehicle back until the curb side adjust according to the road surface and wheel gently touches the curb. If the engine is not running or is driving conditions. ț HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO turned off while driving, the power Set the switch to the SPORT position when ࠗ CURB: 3 assist for the steering will not work. you desire a firm feeling all the time. Steering will be much harder to op- Turn the wheels toward the side of the erate. In the event of an electrical system failure, a road so the vehicle will move away from signal stored in the system’s computer the center of the road if it moves. memory is automatically sent to the active 4. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” ACTIVE DAMPER SUSPEN- damper suspension control unit and the ac- tuators. The shock absorbers now function as position and remove the key. SION (if so equipped) they would on a vehicle not equipped with the The active damper suspension controls damp- POWER STEERING active damper suspension function. Contact ing force and helps minimize the movement of an INFINITI retailer for service. The power assisted steering is designed to the vehicle body. It helps stable driving when use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to the vehicle moves up and down on large assist steering. rolling roads or when the vehicle body leans If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, during cornering with a high centrifugal force.

5-35

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

BRAKE SYSTEM high speeds until the brakes function cor- a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may rectly. reduce braking performance and could result The brake system has two separate hydraulic in loss of vehicle control. circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will Parking brake bedding still have braking at two wheels. The parking brake shoes must be “bedded WARNING Vacuum assisted brakes down” whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the The brake booster aids braking by using ț While driving on a slippery sur- parking brake shoes and/or drums are re- engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can face, be careful when braking, ac- placed, in order to assure the best braking stop the vehicle by depressing the brake celerating or downshifting. Abrupt performance. pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the braking or accelerating could brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle This procedure is described in the Vehicle cause the wheels to skid and re- and the stopping distance will be longer. service manual and can be performed by your sult in an accident. INFINITI retailer. ț Wet brakes If the engine is not running or is Using the brakes turned off while driving, the When the vehicle is washed or driven through power assist for the brakes will water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal not work. Braking will be harder. your braking distance will be longer and the while driving. This will overheat the brakes, vehicle may pull to one side during braking. wear out the brake linings and pads faster and reduce gas mileage. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe (ABS) speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to To help save the brakes and to prevent the heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes brakes from overheating, reduce speed and The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at downshift to a lower gear before going down at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when

5-36

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING braking abruptly or when braking on slippery vary according to road conditions.) When the pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal surfaces. The system detects the rotation anti-lock system senses that one or more and is not an indication of any malfunction. If speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid wheels are close to locking up, the actuator the computer senses any malfunction, it pressure to prevent each wheel from locking. (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases switches the anti-lock brake system OFF and By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakes turns on the ABS brake warning light in the the driver maintain steering control and helps very quickly). While the actuator is working, dashboard. The brake system will then behave to minimize swerving and spinning on slip- you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal normally, but without anti-lock assistance. pery surfaces. and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator If the light comes on during the self-test, or under the hood. This is normal and indicates Using the system while you are driving, you should take your that the anti-lock system is working properly. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. vehicle to your INFINITI retailer for repair at However, the pulsation may indicate that road your earliest convenience. conditions are hazardous and extra care is WARNING required while driving. Self-test feature WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping The anti-lock brake system consists of elec- The anti-lock brake system is a so- distances. tronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic phisticated device, but it cannot pre- solenoids controlled by a computer. The vent accidents resulting from care- computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that less or dangerous driving tech- Normal operation tests the system each time you start the engine niques. It can help maintain vehicle The anti-lock brake system will not operate at and move the vehicle at a low speed in control during braking on slippery speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will you may hear a clank noise and/or feel a

5-37

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

system is operating, the slip indicator will surfaces, but remember that the and type as specified on the tire also blink. stopping distance on slippery sur- placard. See “Vehicle identifica- faces will be longer than on normal tion” in the “10. Technical and ț If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is surfaces, even with the anti-lock consumer information” section under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive system. Stopping distances may for tire placard location. carefully. See “Slip indicator light”, and also be longer on rough, gravel or “Vehicle dynamic control off indicator snow covered roads, or if you are light” in the “Instruments and controls” using tire chains. Always maintain a VEHICLE DYNAMIC CON- section. safe distance from the vehicle in TROL SYSTEM (VDC) ț Indicator light front of you. Ultimately, the respon- When driving on slippery surfaces or sud- If a malfunction occurs in the system, the sibility for safety of yourself and denly avoiding obstacles on roads, the vehicle SLIP and indicator lights come on others rests in the hands of the might swerve or slip. With the vehicle dy- driver. in the meter panel. namic control (VDC) system, sensors detect As long as these warning lights are on, the Tire type and condition of tires may these movements and control the braking and traction control function is canceled. also affect braking effectiveness. engine output to help improve vehicle stability The VDC system uses a Brake Limited Slip ț while driving. When replacing tires, install the Differential (LSD) system to improve vehicle ț specified size of tires on all four When the vehicle dynamic control system traction. The brake LSD system works when wheels. is operating, the slip indicator in the one of the driving wheels is spinning on a ț When installing a spare tire, instrument panel blinks. slippery surface. The brake LSD system make sure it is the proper size ț When only the traction control system brakes the spinning wheel which distributed portion of the vehicle dynamic control the driving power to the other drive wheel. If

5-38

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dy- ț When driving on extremely in- namic control system turned off, all VDC and WARNING TCS functions will be turned off. The brake clined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the vehicle dy- LSD system and ABS will still operate with the ț The vehicle dynamic control sys- namics control system may not VDC system off. If the brake LSD system or tem is designed to help improve operate properly or the vehicle the ABS is activated, the slip indicator light driving stability but does not pre- dynamics control off indicator will blink and you may hear a clunk noise vent accidents due to abrupt steer- light may come on. Do not drive and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This ing operation at high speeds or by on these types of roads. is normal. careless or dangerous driving ț If the tires other than the recom- While the VDC system is operating, you may techniques. Reduce vehicle speed mended ones are used, the ve- feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a and be especially careful when hicle dynamics control system noise or vibration from under the hood. This driving and cornering on slippery may not operate properly or the is normal and indicates that the VDC system surfaces and always drive care- vehicle dynamics control off indi- is working properly. fully. cator light may come on. ț The computer has a built in diagnostic feature If suspension parts such as shock ț The vehicle dynamics control sys- that tests the system each time you start the absorbers, struts, springs and tem is not a substitute for winter engine and move the vehicle forward or in bushings are not standard equip- tires or tire chains on a snow reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test ment or are extremely deterio- covered road. occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or rated, the vehicle dynamics con- feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is trol off indicator light may come normal and is not an indication of a malfunc- on. tion.

5-39

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

COLD WEATHER DRIVING information, see “Battery” in the “8. Do-it- yourself” section. speed and be especially careful FREEING A FROZEN DOOR when driving and cornering on LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WA- slippery surfaces and always To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply TER drive carefully. de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If the vehicle is to be left outside without ț If suspension parts such as shock If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by open- absorbers, struts, springs and inserting it into the key hole. ing the drain plug located under the radiator. bushings are not standard equip- Refill before operating the vehicle. See “En- ment or are extremely deterio- ANTI-FREEZE gine cooling system” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” rated, the vehicle dynamics con- In the winter when it is anticipated that the section for changing engine coolant. trol off indicator light may come temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), on. check anti-freeze to assure proper winter WARNING ț When driving on extremely in- protection. For additional information, see clined surfaces such as higher “Engine Cooling System” in the “8. Do-it- ț The vehicle dynamics control sys- banked corners, the vehicle dy- yourself” section. tem is designed to help improve namics control system may not BATTERY driving stability but does not pre- operate properly or the vehicle dynamics control off indicator If the battery is not fully charged during vent accidents due to abrupt steer- light may come on. Do not drive extremely cold weather conditions, the battery ing operation at high speeds or by on these types of roads. fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To careless or dangerous driving maintain maximum efficiency, the battery techniques. Reduce vehicle should be checked regularly. For additional

5-40

੬ 02.11.18/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

ANTI-FREEZE recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ț If the tires other than the recom- ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. mended ones are used, the ve- When it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the anti-freeze Please consult your INFINITI retailer for hicle dynamics control system the tire type, size, speed rating and avail- may not operate properly or the to assure proper winter protection. For addi- ability information. vehicle dynamics control off indi- tional information, see “Engine cooling sys- cator light may come on. tem” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some ț The vehicle dynamics control sys- BATTERY provinces and states prohibit their use. tem is not a substitute for winter If the battery is not fully charged during Check local, state and provincial laws tires or tire chains on a snow extremely cold weather conditions, the battery before installing studded tires. covered road. fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery Skid and traction capabilities of studded should be checked regularly. For additional snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may COLD WEATHER DRIVING information, see “Battery” in the “8. Do-it- be poorer than that of non-studded snow FREEING A FROZEN DOOR yourself” section. tires. LOCK TIRE EQUIPMENT 3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply sure they are of proper size for the tires on 1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to de-icer or glycerin through the key hole. If the your vehicle and are installed according to provide superior performance on dry pave- lock becomes frozen, heat the key before the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. ment. However, the performance of these inserting it into the key hole. tires will be substantially reduced in snowy Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord- Be careful not to damage the plastic part of the and icy conditions. If you operate your ing to location. Check the local laws before key. vehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITI installing tire chains. When installing tire

5-41

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING chains, make sure they are of proper size for dling and performance may be adversely DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE the tires on your vehicle and are installed affected. according to the chain manufacturer’s sugges- Never install tire chains on a T-type spare tire. WARNING tions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class Do not use tire chains on dry roads. “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted ț SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use rain), very cold snow or ice can be Class “S” chains are designed to meet the It is recommended that the following items be slick and very hard to drive on. The SAE standard minimum clearances between carried in the vehicle during winter: vehicle will have a lot less traction the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or 1. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- or grip under these conditions. Try body component required to accommodate the move ice and snow from the windows and to avoid driving on wet ice until the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or wiper blades. road is salted or sanded. cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. 2. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the ț Whatever the condition, drive Other types may damage your vehicle. Use jack to give it firm support. with caution. Accelerate and slow chain tensioners when recommended by the down with care. If accelerating or 3. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. downshifting too fast, the drive drifts. Loose end links of the tire chain must be wheels will lose even more trac- secured or removed to prevent the possibility 4. Extra window washer fluid to refill the tion. of whipping action damage to the fenders or reservoir tank. ț Allow more stopping distance un- underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading der these conditions. Braking your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi- should be started sooner than on tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle han-

5-42

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ STARTING AND DRIVING

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so dry pavement. equipped) ț Allow greater following distances An engine block heater to assist extreme cold on slippery roads. temperature starting is available through your ț Watch for slippery spots (glare INFINITI retailer. ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded WARNING areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Do not use your heater with an un- Try not to brake while actually on grounded electrical system or two- the ice, and avoid any sudden pronged (cheater) adapters. You can steering maneuvers. be injured by an electrical shock if ț Do not use cruise control on slip- you use an ungrounded connection. pery roads. ț Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

5-43

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ ੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Roadside assistance program ...... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats...... 6-12 Flat tire ...... 6-2 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-13 Run-flat tires (if so equipped) ...... 6-3 Towing recommended by INFINITI ...... 6-14 Changing a flat tire ...... 6-4 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck Jump starting...... 6-9 vehicle)...... 6-15 Push starting...... 6-12

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE FLAT TIRE sure warning system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. PROGRAM This vehicle is equipped with the low tire Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year, pressure warning system, which displays unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance plan. pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on WARNING In the event of a roadside emergency, Road- the monitor screen by sending a signal from a ț If the low tire pressure warning side Assistance Service is available to you. sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the light comes on or a WARNING is Please refer to your Warranty Booklet (U.S.) or vehicle is being driven with a flat tire (lower displayed on the monitor screen Warranty & Roadside assistance information than 10 psi, 70 kPa) or very low tire pressure while driving, avoid sudden steer- booklet (Canada) for details. Both the War- (lower than 26 psi, 180 kPa), the low tire ing maneuvers or abrupt braking, ranty Booklet and Roadside Assistance Calling pressure warning system will activate and reduce vehicle speed, pull off the Card in your Owner’s Literature Portfolio pro- warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning road to a safe location and stop the vide the Toll-Free Number to call for light or a WARNING (FLAT TIRE or LOW vehicle as soon as possible. Seri- assistance. Roadside Assistance is provided PRESSURE) displayed on the screen. This ous vehicle damage could occur 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, for 4 years system will activate only when the vehicle is and may lead to an accident and from the date sold to give emergency roadside driven at speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). could result in serious personal help, in the event of mechanical or nonme- For more details, please refer to injury. Check the pressure for all chanical trouble(s) such as flat tires, four tires and adjust the pressure out-of-gas, dead battery, lost keys, mechanical “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind- to the COLD tire pressure shown breakdown, accident, etc. ers” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section, “Tire pressure information” in the “4. on the tire placard. If you have a Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated flat tire, replace it with a spare tire control systems” section and “Low tire pres- as soon as possible.

6-2

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

ț If your vehicle is equipped with ț Do not inject any tire liquid or member that vehicle handling run-flat tires, you can continue aerosol tire sealant into the tires, stability is reduced, which could driving after you have a flat tire. as this may cause a malfunction lead to an accident and personal However, remember that vehicle of the tire pressure sensors. injury. Also, driving a long dis- handling stability is reduced, tance at high speeds may damage which could lead to an accident the tires. and personal injury. See “Wheels RUN-FLAT TIRES (if so equipped) ț Do not drive at speeds above 55 and tires” in the “8. Do-it- Run-flat tires are those tires that can be used MPH (88 km/h) and do not drive yourself” section for more details temporarily if they are punctured. After driving more than 50 miles (80 km) with and make sure to observe the to a safe location, replace the punctured a punctured run-flat tire. A punc- cautions about run-flat tires. Fail- run-flat tire, following the instructions later in tured tire may burst and cause a ure to do so may result in a “Changing a flat tire”. For additional informa- serious accident, resulting in per- serious accident. tion, see “Wheels and tires” in the “8. Do-it- sonal injury. yourself” section. Also, see the tire safety ț When a spare tire is mounted or a information in the INFINITI Warranty Informa- ț Drive safely at reduced speeds. wheel is replaced, tire pressure tion Booklet. Avoid hard cornering or braking, will not be indicated and the low which may cause you to lose con- tire pressure warning system will trol of the vehicle. not function. Contact your WARNING INFINITI retailer as soon as pos- ț If a rear tire is punctured, replace sible for tire replacement and/or ț Although you can continue driving it with a non-punctured tire, es- system resetting. with a punctured run-flat tire, re- pecially when driving on rainy

6-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE snowy or icy roads. If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions WARNING below. CAUTION ț Make sure that the parking brake Stopping the vehicle is securely applied and the auto- ț Never install tire chains on a punc- 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and matic transmission is shifted into tured run-flat tire, as this could away from traffic. P (Park). damage your vehicle. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. ț Never change tires when the ve- ț Avoid driving over any projection hicle is on a slope, ice or slippery or pothole, as the clearance be- 3. Park on a level surface and apply the areas. This is hazardous. tween the vehicle and the ground parking brake. Shift the automatic trans- is smaller than normal. mission to P (Park). ț Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. ț Do not enter an automated car 4. Turn off the engine. Wait for professional road assis- wash with a punctured run-flat 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to tance. tire. signal professional road assistance per- ț When a spare tire is mounted or a ț Have the punctured tire replaced sonnel that you need assistance. wheel is replaced, tire pressure by your INFINITI retailer as soon 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle will not be indicated and the low as possible, as the tire’s perfor- and stand in a safe place, away from traffic tire pressure warning system will mance capability is reduced. and clear of the vehicle. not function. Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as pos-

6-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it sible for tire replacement and/or is jacked up. system resetting. WARNING Blocking wheels Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury. SIE0063 Getting the spare tire and tools Remove jacking tools and spare tire from the storage area located inside the trunk as illustrated.

SIE0002 SIE0058

Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat

6-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Removing wheel cap Jacking up the vehicle and removing the damaged tire other vehicles. The jack is designed only for lifting your vehicle during a tire change. ț Use the correct jack up points; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. ț Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. SIE0050A ț Never use blocks on or under the SIE0006 jack. ț Do not start or run engine while CAUTION vehicle is on the jack, as it may WARNING cause the vehicle to move. This is Do not use your hands to pry off wheel especially true for vehicles with caps. Doing so could result in per- ț Never get under the vehicle while limited slip differential carriers. sonal injury. it is supported only by the jack. ț Do not allow passengers to stay ț Use only the jack provided with in the vehicle while it is on the your vehicle. Do not use the jack jack. provided with your vehicle on Carefully read the caution label at-

6-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY tached to the jack body and the following instructions.

SIE0001

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up nuts until the tire is off the ground. point so that top of the jack contacts the 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, center of both the jack head and the notch securely hold the jack lever and rod with at the jack-up point as shown. Also fit the both hands as shown above. Remove the notched portion of the vehicle in the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire. groove of the jack head as shown. The jack should be used on level firm ground. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel

6-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Installing the spare tire curely in the sequence as illustrated. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for WARNING three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). ț Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly COLD tire pressures are shown on the tightened wheel nuts can cause tire placard located on the front face the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an ac- of the rear left wheel housing inside cident. the vehicle. After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire ICE006M ț Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could pressure, the display of the tire pressure 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface cause the nuts to become loose. information may show higher pressure than between the wheel and hub. the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the ț As soon as possible tighten the wheel is because the tire pressurizes as the tire wheel nuts finger tight. nuts to the specified torque with a temperature rises. This does not indicate a 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel torque wrench. system malfunction. nuts alternately and evenly until they are Wheel nut tightening torque: tight. 80 ft-lb (108 N⅐m) WARNING 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire ț Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres- touches the ground. Then, with the wheel sure. Retighten the wheel nuts when the nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts se-

6-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

JUMP STARTING vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a WARNING To start your engine with a booster battery, flat tire, etc.). the instructions and precautions below must ț Always make sure that the spare be followed. tire and jacking equipment are Stowing the damaged tire and properly secured after use. tools Such items can become danger- WARNING ous projectiles in an accident or ț sudden stop. If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, re- ț The spare tire is designed for sulting in severe injury or death. It emergency use. See “Wheels and could also damage your vehicle. tires” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” ț section. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames If needed Roadside Assistance is available. away from the battery. SIE0059 Please see your Warranty Information Booklet ț or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the Do not allow battery fluid to come Securely store the damaged tire and jacking toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & into contact with eyes, skin, cloth equipment in the vehicle. Roadside assistance information booklet or painted surfaces. Battery fluid (Canada). is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe

6-9

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

burns. If the fluid should come frozen battery. It could explode into contact with anything, imme- and cause serious injury. diately flush the contacted area ț Your vehicle has an automatic with water. engine cooling fan. It could come ț Keep battery out of the reach of on at any time. Keep hands and children. other objects away from it. ț The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. rated battery can damage your Please see your Warranty Information Booklet vehicle. or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the ț Whenever working on or near a toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside assistance information booklet battery, always wear suitable eye SIE0017 protectors (for example, goggles (Canada). or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, WARNING or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump start- Always follow the instructions below. ing. Failure to do so could result in dam- ț Do not attempt to jump start a age to the charging system and cause personal injury.

6-10

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, positive (+) and negative (−) to position the two vehicles to bring their CAUTION batteries into close proximity to each body ground (for example, strut other. mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc. — not to the bat- Do not keep the starter motor en- Do not allow the two vehicles to tery). gaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, touch. ț Make sure the jumper cables do turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 sec- 2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector not touch moving parts in the onds before trying again. lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces- engine compartment and that sary electrical systems (light, heater, air clamps do not contact any other conditioner, etc.). metal. 7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so positive cable. equipped). Cover the battery with an old 5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be cloth to reduce explosion hazard. it run for a few minutes. sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover 6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as the vent holes as it may be contaminated at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine illustrated. with corrosive acid. in the normal manner.

CAUTION

ț Always connect positive (+) to

6-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

PUSH STARTING tance information booklet (Canada). extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER- abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: CAUTION HEATS 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply ț Automatic transmission models the parking brake and move the selector cannot be push started. This may WARNING lever to P (Park). cause transmission damage. ț Do not continue to drive if your ve- Do not stop the engine. ț Three way catalyst equipped hicle overheats. Doing so could 2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open models should not be started by cause a vehicle fire. all the windows, move the heater or air pushing. The three way catalyst ț conditioner temperature control to maxi- may be damaged. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radia- mum hot and fan control to high speed. ț Never try to start the vehicle by tor cap while the engine is still 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for towing it; when the engine starts, hot. When the radiator cap is steam or coolant escaping from the radia- the forward surge could cause the removed, pressurized hot water tor before opening the hood. Wait until no vehicle to collide with the tow will spurt out, possibly causing steam or coolant can be seen before vehicle. serious injury. proceeding. ț Do not open the hood if steam is 4. Open the engine hood. If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. coming out. Please see your Warranty Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside assis-

6-12

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

ing instructions are available from your ț The engine cooling fan can start WARNING INFINITI retailer. Local service operators will at any time when the coolant generally be familiar with the applicable laws temperature is high. If steam or water is coming from the and procedures for towing. To assure proper engine, stand clear to prevent getting towing and to prevent accidental damage to burned. 6. After the engine cools down, check the your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that you coolant level in the reservoir tank with the have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is engine running. Add coolant to the reser- advisable to have the service operator care- 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or voir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle fully read the following precautions. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is repaired at the nearest INFINITI retailer. running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. WARNING the drive belt is missing or loose, or the Please see your Warranty Information Booklet ț cooling fan does not run, stop the engine. or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the Never ride in a vehicle that is be- toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & ing towed. ț WARNING Roadside assistance information booklet Never get under your vehicle after (Canada). it has been lifted by a tow truck. ț Be careful not to allow your hands, TOWING YOUR VEHICLE hair, jewelry or clothing to come When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin- into contact with, or to get caught CAUTION in, the cooling fan or drive belt. cial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing ț When towing, make sure that the equipment could damage your vehicle. Tow-

6-13

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

transmission, axles, steering system and power train are in work- CAUTION ing condition. If any unit is dam- ț aged, dollies must be used. Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on ț Always attach safety chains be- the ground or four wheels on the fore towing. ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expen- If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. sive damage to the transmission. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet If it is necessary to tow the vehicle or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the with the front wheels raised, al- toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & ways use towing dollies under the Roadside assistance information booklet rear wheels. (Canada). ț When towing rear wheel drive TOWING RECOMMENDED BY models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: INFINITI Turn the ignition key to the OFF INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be SIE0037 position, and secure the steering towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the wheel in a straight-ahead posi- ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck tion with a rope or similar device. as illustrated. Never secure the steering wheel

6-14

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a by turning the ignition key to the stuck vehicle) LOCK position. This may damage CAUTION the steering lock mechanism. ț Use the towing hooks only as illustrated, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. ț Use the towing hooks only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the towing hooks. ț SIE0038 The towing hook is under tremen- dous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.

SIE0060

6-15

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING

ț Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. ț Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

6-16

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 7 APPEARANCE AND CARE

Cleaning exterior ...... 7-2 Seat belts...... 7-5 Washing ...... 7-2 Rear sun shade (if so equipped)...... 7-5 Waxing ...... 7-2 Corrosion protection ...... 7-6 Removing spots...... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to ve- Underbody...... 7-3 hicle corrosion ...... 7-6 Glass ...... 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate of Aluminum alloy wheels...... 7-4 corrosion...... 7-6 Chrome parts...... 7-4 To protect your vehicle from Cleaning interior ...... 7-4 corrosion...... 7-6 Floor mats...... 7-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ APPEARANCE AND CARE

CLEANING EXTERIOR Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the In order to maintain the appearance of your CAUTION body cover. vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. WASHING ț Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong In the following cases, please wash your Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle chemical detergents, gasoline or vehicle as soon as possible to protect the with a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. solvents. paint surface. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild ț soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a general Do not wash the vehicle in direct ț after a rainfall to prevent possible damage purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, sunlight or while the vehicle body from acid rain lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the vehicle is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. ț after driving on coastal roads again with plenty of clean water. ț Avoid using tight-napped or rough ț when contaminants such as soot, bird Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, cloths, such as washing mitts. droppings, tree sap, metal particles or hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable Care must be taken when remov- bugs get on the paint surface to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these ing caked-on dirt or other foreign areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure ț when dust or mud builds up on the surface substances so that the paint sur- that the drain holes in the lower edge of the face is not scratched or damaged. Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle door are open. Spray water under the body inside a garage or in a covered area. and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. When it is necessary to park outside, park in WAXING a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax cover. by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle. specified for use over clear coats, such as

7-2

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ APPEARANCE AND CARE

Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax, because your or staining. Special cleaning products are GLASS INFINITI has been finished with the finest paint available at your INFINITI retailer or automo- and hard clear coats. Your INFINITI retailer can tive accessory stores. assist you in choosing the proper product. UNDERBODY ț Wax your vehicle only after a thorough In areas where road salt is used in winter, the washing. Follow the instructions supplied underbody must be cleaned regularly. This with the wax. will prevent dirt and salt from building up and ț Do not use a wax containing any abra- causing underbody and suspension corrosion. sives, cutting compounds or cleaners that Before the winter period and again in the may damage the vehicle finish. spring, the underseal must be checked and, if SIA0010 necessary, re-treated. ț If the surface does not polish easily, use a When cleaning the rear window, it may be road tar remover and wax again. easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first. Machine compound or aggressive pol- ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint Be careful when removing the high-mounted finish may dull the finish or leave swirl stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the marks. high-mounted stop light wires. REMOVING SPOTS The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle. Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for

7-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ APPEARANCE AND CARE glass to become coated with a film after the CLEANING INTERIOR ț vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner Never use fabric protectors un- Occasionally remove loose dust from the and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. less recommended by the manu- interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a facturer. vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl ț Do not use glass or plastic CAUTION and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth cleaner on meter or gauge lens dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe covers. It may damage the lens When cleaning the inside of the win- clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any cover. dow, do not use sharp-edged tools, fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s rec- abrasive cleaners or chlorine based ommendations. Some fabric protectors con- disinfectant cleaners. They could tain chemicals that may stain or bleach the FLOOR MATS damage the electrical conductors, seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with The use of genuine floor mats can extend the radio antenna elements or rear win- water, to clean the meter and gauge lens. life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to dow defogger elements. clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS CAUTION your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent inter- Wash regularly, especially during winter ț Never use benzine, thinner, or any ference with pedal operation. Mats months in areas where road salt is used. Salt similar material. should be maintained with regular cleaning could discolor the wheel if not removed. ț Leather seats should be regularly and replaced if they become excessively worn. CHROME PARTS coated with a leather wax like Clean chrome parts regularly with a non- saddle soap. Never use car wax. abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

7-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ APPEARANCE AND CARE

Floor mat positioning aid SEAT BELTS partment. See “Rear sun shade” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section for rear sun The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them shade operation. with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them. CAUTION

Be careful not to damage the screen WARNING while cleaning. Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up SIA0004 in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, Cover dye, or chemical solvents to clean This model includes front floor mat brackets Wipe the rear sun shade cover with a clean, the seat belts since these materials dry cloth. to act as floor mat positioning aid. INFINITI may severely weaken the seat belt floor mats have been specially designed for webbing. your vehicle model. The front floor mats have CAUTION grommet holes incorporated in them. To install, simply position the mat by placing the REAR SUN SHADE (if so Never use benzine, thinner or any floor mat bracket through the floor mat grom- equipped) other neutral detergent as this may met hole while centering the mat in the floor Screen deform the cover. pan contour. To clean, fully extend the rear sun shade Periodically check to make certain that the screen and clean dust or dirt off using a mats are properly positioned. vacuum cleaner from the inside of the com-

7-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ APPEARANCE AND CARE

CORROSION PROTECTION Relative humidity ț Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. MOST COMMON FACTORS Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE relative humidity, especially those areas where ț Keep drain holes at the bottom of the CORROSION the temperatures stay above freezing where doors open to avoid water accumulation. atmospheric pollution exists, or where road 1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining ț Check the underbody for accumulation of salt is used. dirt and debris in body panel sections, sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with cavities, and other areas. Temperature water as soon as possible. 2. Damage to paint and other protective A temperature increase will accelerate the rate coatings caused by gravel and stone chips of corrosion to those parts which are not well CAUTION or minor traffic accidents. ventilated. ț Air pollution NEVER remove dirt, sand or other ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS debris from the passenger com- INFLUENCE THE RATE OF COR- Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the partment by washing it out with a ROSION air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt cleaner or broom. Moisture will also accelerate the disintegration of paint Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the surfaces. ț Never allow water or other liquids vehicle body underside can accelerate corro- to come in contact with electronic sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry com- TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE components inside the vehicle as pletely inside the vehicle, and should be FROM CORROSION this may damage them. removed for drying to avoid floor panel ț Wash your vehicle often to keep the corrosion. vehicle clean.

7-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ APPEARANCE AND CARE

ț See your INFINITI retailer for assistance.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult your local INFINITI retailer.

7-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ ੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 8 DO-IT-YOURSELF

Maintenance precautions...... 8-2 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-16 Engine compartment check locations ...... 8-4 Cleaning ...... 8-16 Engine cooling system ...... 8-5 Replacing ...... 8-17 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Parking brake and brake pedal ...... 8-18 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-6 Checking parking brake ...... 8-18 Engine oil...... 8-7 Checking brake pedal...... 8-18 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-7 Brake booster...... 8-19 Changing engine oil ...... 8-8 Fuses ...... 8-20 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-9 Engine compartment...... 8-20 Automatic transmission fluid ...... 8-10 Passenger compartment...... 8-21 Power steering fluid ...... 8-10 Electronic key battery replacement ...... 8-21 Cooling fan fluid...... 8-11 Lights...... 8-23 Brake fluid ...... 8-11 Headlights ...... 8-24 Window washer fluid ...... 8-12 Battery...... 8-12 Exterior and interior lights...... 8-25 Jump starting ...... 8-14 Wheels and tires ...... 8-29 Drive belts...... 8-14 Tire pressure...... 8-29 Spark plugs ...... 8-15 Types of tires ...... 8-31 Replacing spark plugs ...... 8-15 Tire chains ...... 8-33 Air cleaner...... 8-16 Changing wheels and tires...... 8-34

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

MAINTENANCE PRECAU- forming any parts replacement or ț Never get under the vehicle while TIONS repairs. it is supported only by a jack. If it When performing any inspection or mainte- is necessary to work under the ț If you must work with the engine nance work on your vehicle, always take care vehicle, support it with safety running, keep your hands, clothing, to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself stands. hair and tools away from moving or damage to the vehicle. The following are fans, belts and any other moving ț Keep smoking materials, flame general precautions which should be closely parts. and sparks away from fuel and observed. the battery. ț It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and re- ț The fuel filter or fuel lines should WARNING move any jewelry, such as rings, be serviced by an INFINITI retailer watches, etc. before working on because the fuel lines are under ț Park the vehicle on a level sur- your vehicle. high pressure even when the en- face, apply the parking brake se- gine is off. curely and block the wheels to pre- ț Always wear eye protection vent the vehicle from moving. For whenever you work on your ve- automatic transmission models, hicle. CAUTION move the selector lever to P ț If you must run the engine in an (Park). enclosed space such as a garage, ț Do not work under the hood while ț Be sure the ignition key is in the be sure there is proper ventilation the engine is hot. Turn off the en- OFF or LOCK position when perfor exhaust gases to escape. gine and wait until it cools down.

8-2

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

Manual order information” in the “10. Tech- ț Never connect or disconnect the nical and consumer information” section. battery or any transistorized component connector while the igni- You should be aware that incomplete or tion key is on. improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could ț Never leave the engine or the affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt automatic transmission related about any servicing, we recommend component harness disconnected that it be done by your INFINITI retailer. while the ignition key is on. ț Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improp- erly disposed engine oil, and coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for most owners to perform. A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also available. See “Owner’s Manual/Service

8-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS 1: Fuse/fusible link holder 2: Engine oil filler cap 3: Brake fluid reservoir 4: Coolant reservoir 5: Battery 6: Windshield washer fluid reservoir 7: Power steering fluid reservoir 8: Radiator filler cap 9: Cooling fan fluid reservoir 10: Engine oil dipstick 11: Air cleaner

SID0261

8-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM Outside Demineral- The engine cooling system is filled at the temperature Anti- ized water or LEVEL factory with a high-quality, year-round, anti- down to freeze distilled water freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solu- °C °F tion contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, −35 −30 50% 50% therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary. WARNING CAUTION ț Never remove the radiator cap

When adding or replacing coolant, be when the engine is hot. Serious SID0229 sure to use only a genuine NISSAN burns could be caused by high anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with pressure fluid escaping from the Check the coolant level in the reservoir the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti- radiator. Wait until the engine and tank when the engine is cold.Ifthe freeze and 50% demineralized radiator cool down. See “If your coolant level is below MIN, add coolant up to water/distilled water. The use of vehicle overheats” in the “6. In the MAX level. If the reservoir tank is empty, other types of coolant solutions may case of emergency” section. check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient damage your engine cooling system. ț The radiator is equipped with a coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with pressure cap. To prevent engine coolant up to the filler opening and also add damage, use only a genuine it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. NISSAN radiator cap. If the cooling system requires coolant

8-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF frequently, have it checked by your INFINITI retailer. scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. CHANGING ENGINE COOL- ț Never remove the radiator cap ANT when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. SID0061A ț Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is ț Major cooling system repairs should be made, wash thoroughly with soap performed by your INFINITI retailer. The or hand cleaner as soon as pos- service procedures can be found in the sible. SID0230 appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. ț Keep coolant out of reach of chil- ț Improper servicing can result in reduced dren and pets. heater performance and engine overheating. When changing engine coolant, be sure the ignition switch is off. WARNING 1. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of ț To avoid the danger of being radiator, and remove radiator filler cap.

8-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

ț Be careful not to allow coolant to con- filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up to 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15 tact drive belts. the MAX level. minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. ț Waste coolant must be disposed of 6. Check the drain plug for any sign of properly. Check your local regula- leakage. tions. ENGINE OIL 2. Close the radiator drain plug securely after the coolant is drained. CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 3. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mixture of anti-freeze solution and demineralized water/distilled water. Fill the

reservoir tank up to the MAX level. Then SID0260 install the radiator filler cap. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. 4. Start the engine and warm it up until it Reinsert it all the way, so the circle of the reaches normal operating temperature. dipstick handle faces the vehicle front. Then race the engine two or three times SID0231 under no load. Watch the engine coolant 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the temperature gauge for signs of overheat- 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and oil level. It should be between the H and L ing. apply the parking brake. marks. If the oil level is below the L mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recom- 5. Stop the engine. After it completely 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating mended oil through the opening. Do not cools down, refill the radiator up to the temperature. overfill.

8-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

ț The oil level on the dipstick may look CHANGING ENGINE OIL 6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and different from the upper face and the lower completely drain the oil. face because of its inclination. Check oil If oil filter is to be changed, remove and level on the upper face which has a lower replace it at this time. See later in “Engine apparent oil level. oil” for changing engine oil filter. 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil CAUTION maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the se- Be careful not to burn yourself. The verity of operating conditions. SID0263 engine oil is hot. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and CAUTION apply the parking brake. ț Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Oil level should be checked regu- 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating ț larly. Operating with insufficient temperature. Check your local regulations. amount of oil can damage the en- 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 7. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a gine, and such damage is not cov- minutes. new washer. Securely tighten the drain ered by warranty. plug with a wrench. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb 5. Remove the oil filler cap. (29 to 39 N⅐m)

8-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

Do not use excessive force. CHANGING ENGINE OIL FIL- 8. Refill the engine with recommended oil WARNING TER and install the cap securely. ț Prolonged and repeated contact See “Capacities and recommended with used engine oil may cause fuel/lubricants” in the “10. Technical and skin cancer. consumer information” section for drain ț and refill capacity. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is The drain and refill capacity depends on made, wash thoroughly with soap the oil temperature and drain time. Use or hand cleaner as soon as pos- these specifications for reference only. sible. SID0233 Always use the dipstick to determine when ț Keep used engine oil out of reach the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and of children. apply the parking brake. 9. Start the engine. 2. Turn the engine off. Check for leakage around the drain plug. Correct as required. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it 10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 by hand. minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. 11.Dispose of waste oil properly.

8-9

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

around the oil filter. Correct as required. tomatic transmission durability, CAUTION 8. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 and may damage the automatic minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine transmission, which is not cov- Be careful not to burn yourself. The oil if necessary. ered by the INFINITI new vehicle engine oil will be hot. AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS- limited warranty. 4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface SION FLUID with a clean rag. The specified automatic transmission fluid is When checking or replacement is required, we Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket also described on caution labels located in the recommend your INFINITI retailer for servic- engine compartment. remaining on the mounting surface of the ing. engine. POWER STEERING FLUID 5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter CAUTION with clean engine oil. ț 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resis- Use only Genuine Nissan ATF tance is felt, then tighten additionally more Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with than 2/3 turn. other fluids. ț Using automatic transmission Oil filter tightening torque: fluid other than Genuine Nissan 10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb ATF Matic Fluid J will cause de- (14.7 to 20.6 N⅐m) terioration in driveability and au- SID0234 7. Start the engine and check for leakage

8-10

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank. COOLING FAN FLUID ț Recommended fluid is type Genu- The fluid level should be checked using the ine Nissan PSF-II or equivalent. HOT range on the dipstick at fluid temperature of 122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range on the dipstick at fluid tempera- BRAKE FLUID ture of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).

CAUTION

ț Do not overfill. SID0094 ț Recommended fluid is type Genu- The fluid level should be checked using the ine Nissan PSF-II or equivalent. HOT range on the dipstick at fluid temperature of 122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the SID0069A COLD range on the dipstick at fluid temperature of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C). Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake CAUTION warning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added ț Do not overfill. frequently, the system should be checked by your INFINITI retailer.

8-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

WINDOW WASHER FLUID WARNING WARNING

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or Anti-freeze is poisonous and should contaminated fluid may damage the be stored carefully in marked con- brake system. The use of improper tainers out of the reach of children. fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. CAUTION

SID0262 Do not substitute engine anti-freeze CAUTION Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning coolant for windshield washer solu- light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the tion. This may result in damage to the Do not spill the fluid on painted sur- water for better cleaning. In the winter season, paint. faces. This will damage the paint. If add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow fluid is spilled, immediately wash the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture BATTERY the surfaces with water. ratio. ț Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solution of baking soda and water. ț Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

8-12

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

ț If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (—) fluid in the battery is low. Low battery terminal cable to prevent discharg- battery fluid can cause a higher ing it. load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an WARNING explosion. ț When working on or near a bat- ț Do not expose the battery to tery, always wear suitable eye flames or electrical sparks. Hy- IDI096 protection and remove all jew- drogen gas generated by the bat- elry. Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove the tery is explosive. Do not allow bat- battery cover if it is necessary). It should be tery fluid to contact your skin, ț Battery posts, terminals and re- eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. lated accessories contain lead between the MAX. and MIN. lines. After touching a battery or battery and lead compounds. Wash If it is necessary to add fluid, add only cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. hands after handling. distilled water to bring the level to the Thoroughly wash your hands. If ț Keep the battery out of the reach indicator in each filler opening. Do not the acid contacts your eyes, skin of children. overfill. or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. ț Do not operate the vehicle if the

8-13

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

JUMP STARTING DRIVE BELTS If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact your INFINITI retailer.

SID0221A

1. Remove the cell plugs. 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX. level. If the side of the battery is not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell, as illustrated. SID0235 3. Tighten cell plugs. 1: Water pump 2: Alternator Vehicles operated in high temperatures or 3: Crankshaft pulley under severe conditions require frequent 4: Power steering fluid pump checks of the battery fluid level. 5: Air conditioner compressor

8-14

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

SPARK PLUGS Platinum-tipped spark plugs WARNING WARNING Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could Be sure the engine and ignition rotate unexpectedly. switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If CAUTION the belt is in poor condition or loose, have IDI072M it replaced or adjusted by your INFINITI Be sure to use the correct socket to retailer. remove the spark plugs. An incorrect It is not necessary to replace the platinum- tipped spark plugs as frequently as the con- 2. Have the belts checked regularly for con- socket can cause damage to the ventional type spark plugs since they will last dition and tension in accordance with the spark plugs. much longer. Follow the maintenance sched- maintenance schedule in this manual. Always replace spark plugs with recom- ule, but do not reuse them by cleaning or mended or equivalent ones. regapping. REPLACING SPARK PLUGS If replacement is required, see your INFINITI retailer for servicing.

8-15

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

AIR CLEANER WINDSHIELD WIPER WARNING BLADES CLEANING ț Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or If your windshield is not clear after using the others to be burned. The air windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters cleaner not only cleans the air, it when running, wax or other material may be stops flame if the engine back- on the blade or windshield. fires. If it isn’t there, and the en- Clean the outside of the windshield with a gine backfires, you could be washer solution or a mild detergent. Your SID0236 burned. Do not drive with the air windshield is clean if beads do not form when The filter element should not be cleaned and cleaner removed, and be careful rinsing with clear water. working on the engine with the air reused. Replace it according to the mainte- Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth cleaner off. nance intervals. See “Periodic maintenance soaked in a washer solution or a mild deter- schedules” in the “9. Maintenance” section for ț Never pour fuel into the throttle gent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If maintenance intervals. When replacing the body or attempt to start the en- your windshield is still not clear after cleaning filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner gine with the air cleaner re- the blades and using the wiper, replace the housing and the cover with a damp cloth. moved. Doing so could result in blades. serious injury.

8-16

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

REPLACING 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until a click sounds.

CAUTION

After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it may be damaged when SID0249 the engine hood is opened. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass, otherwise the arm may be 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position damaged from wind pressure. and the windshield wiper switch ON. Turn the ignition switch OFF when the wiper is Worn windshield wiper blades can in the fully up position. The wiper will stop damage the windshield and impair driver vision. as illustrated. IDI018M The wiper should be in the fully up position to avoid scratching the engine 2. Pull the wiper arm. hood or wiper arm. 3. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper blade.

8-17

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

PARKING BRAKE AND CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL BRAKE PEDAL CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

IDI071MD

With the engine running, check the distance IDI070MB between the upper surface of the pedal and the SID0237 metal floor. If it is out of the range shown From the released position, depress the park- above, see your INFINITI retailer. If you wax the surface of the hood, be ing brake pedal slowly and firmly, and check careful not to let wax get into the washer the distance between the initial and final Self-adjusting brakes nozzle. This may cause clogging or im- position of the pedal. If it is out of the range Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting proper windshield washer operation. If shown above, see your INFINITI retailer. wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with brakes. a needle or small pin. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

8-18

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

does not affect the function or performance of 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the WARNING the brake system. engine. The pedal height should drop a little. The rear drum parking brakes (if so equipped) See an INFINITI retailer for a brake do not have audible wear indicators. Should 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the system check if the brake pedal you ever hear an unusually loud noise from engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for height does not return to normal. the rear drum parking brakes, have them about 30 seconds, the pedal height should inspected as soon as possible by your IN- not change. Brake pad wear indicators FINITI retailer. 4. Run the engine for 1 minute without depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. The disc brake pads on your vehicle have Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional informa- Depress the brake pedal several times. The audible wear indicators. When a brake pad pedal travel distance will decrease gradu- tion, see “Periodic maintenance schedules” in requires replacement, it will make a high ally with each depression as the vacuum is the “9. Maintenance” section for maintenance pitched scraping or screeching sound when released from the booster. the vehicle is in motion whether or not the intervals. If the brakes do not operate properly, see your brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes BRAKE BOOSTER checked as soon as possible if the wear INFINITI retailer. indicator sound is heard. Check the brake booster function as follows: Under some driving or climate conditions, 1. With the engine off, press and release the occasional brake squeak, squeal or other brake pedal several times. When brake noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise pedal movement (distance of travel) re- during light to moderate stops is normal and mains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step.

8-19

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

FUSES check for an open fuse. Fusible links 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight CAUTION switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse 3. Remove the fuse box cover. box cover. This could damage the 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. electrical system or cause a fire. 5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. SID0239 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6. If a new fuse opens again, have the electrical system checked and repaired by If any electrical equipment does not operate your INFINITI retailer. and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine parts. See your INFINITI retailer.

SID0238

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

8-20

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ELECTRONIC KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

SID0075

If any electrical equipment does not operate, 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new check for an open fuse. fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight 5. If a new fuse opens again, have the switch are OFF. electrical system checked and repaired by your INFINITI retailer. 2. Open the fuse box cover. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

SIP0280

8-21

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

Replace the battery as follows: other than replacement, perform step 5 device must accept any interference re- above. ceived, including interference that may 1. Remove the emergency key and the screw cause undesired operation of the de- from the electronic key. ț An improperly disposed battery can vice. hurt the environment. Always con- 2. Remove the outer case. firm local regulations for battery dis- 3. Open the inner case using a suitable tool. posal. 4. Replace the battery with a new one. ț The electronic key is water-proof; Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva- however, if it does get wet, immedi- lent ately wipe completely dry. Make sure that the ᮍ side faces the bot- FCC Notice: tom of the case. Changes or modifications not expressly 5. Close the inner case securely. approved by the manufacturer compli- 6. Assemble the outer case. ance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 7. Press the key button two or three times to check its operation. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry See your INFINITI retailer if you need any Canada. assistance for replacement. Operation is subject to the following two If the battery is removed for any reason conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

8-22

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

LIGHTS 1: Headlight, clearance, front turn signal and side marker light 2: Front personal light 3: Rear personal light 4: Side turn signal light 5: Step light 6: Trunk light 7: High-mounted stop light 8: License plate light 9: Rear combination light (Back-up, turn signal and tail/stop/side marker)

SID0240

8-23

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

HEADLIGHTS bulb. If replacement is required, see your INFINITI retailer for servicing. and smoke may enter the head- Replacing the xenon headlight light body and affect the perfor- bulb mance of the headlight. CAUTION WARNING ț High pressure halogen gas is Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is HIGH VOLTAGE sealed inside the bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is necessary, contact your INFINITI re- scratched or the bulb is dropped. tailer. When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent ț Hold the plastic base when han- an electric shock, never attempt to dling the bulb. Never touch the modify or disassemble. Always have glass envelope. your xenon headlights replaced at an ț Use the same number and watt- INFINITI retailer. For additional in- age as originally installed: formation, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” in the “2. Instruments Wattage 55 and controls” section. Bulb no. H1 Replacing the halogen headlight ț Do not leave the bulb out of the bulb headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen)

8-24

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. Front turn signal light* 27 1156 Clearance light* 5 168 Front side marker light* 5 168 Side turn signal light* 1 — Rear combination light back-up 18 921 turn signal 21 7440A stop/tail/side marker 21/5 7443 License plate light 5 168 Front personal light Spot light 8 — Console light 1.4 — Rear personal light 8 — Vanity mirror light 1.4 — Step light 2.7 158 Trunk light 3.4 158 High-mounted stop light 18 — *: See an INFINITI retailer for replacement.

8-25

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

SID0116 SID0241

8-26

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

SID0242

8-27

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

SID0112

SID0245

SID0243 SID0244

8-28

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. TIRE PRESSURE Maximum inflation pressure

SID0246

IDI002

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressures shown on the side wall of the tire. Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressure (including spare) at SID0194B least once a month and always prior to long

8-29

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF distance trips. Incorrect tire pressure may case of emergency” section. If the tire pres- adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. sure displayed on the monitor screen is lower unfavorable handling characteris- Tire pressure should be checked when the than the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire tics and could also lead to a tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD placard, check the tire pressure of all four serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more wheels and adjust them to the COLD tire result in failure of other vehicle hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at pressure as indicated above. The low tire components. moderate speeds. COLD tire pressures are pressure warning system will activate only shown on the tire placard located on the front when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 ț Before taking a long trip, or face of the rear left wheel housing inside the MPH (32 km/h). whenever you have loaded your vehicle. vehicle heavily, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire This vehicle is equipped with a low tire WARNING pressures are at the specified pressure warning system, which displays the level. tire pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) ț Improperly inflated tires can fail ț on the monitor screen by sending a signal suddenly and cause an accident. Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (140 km/h) unless it is from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. ț The vehicle weight capacity is equipped with high speed capa- For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure indicated on the tire placard. Do bility tires. Driving faster than 85 warning light” in the “2. Instruments and not load your vehicle beyond this MPH (140 km/h) may result in tire Controls” section, “Tire pressure information” capacity. Overloading your ve- failure, loss of control and pos- in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio and voice- hicle may result in reduced tire sible injury. activated control systems” section, “Low tire life, unsafe operating conditions pressure warning system” in the “starting and due to premature tire failure, or ț For additional information re- driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “6. In

8-30

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

Summer tires garding tires, refer to “Important tires, and may not match the po- Tire Safety Information” (US) or tential maximum vehicle speed. Summer tire performance in snow and ice will “Tire Safety Information” Never exceed the maximum be substantially reduced. Summer tires do not (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty speed rating of the tire. have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire Information booklet. sidewall. ț For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy TYPES OF TIRES Tire Safety Information” (US) or conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of “Tire Safety Information” SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty wheels. CAUTION Information booklet. Snow tires ț When changing or replacing tires, If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to be sure all four tires are of the All season tires select tires equivalent in size and load rating same type (Example: summer, all INFINITI specifies all season tires on some to the original equipment tires. If you do not, season, snow or run-flat) and con- models to provide good performance for use it can adversely affect the safety and handling struction. An INFINITI retailer may all year around, including snowy and icy road be able to help you with informa- of your vehicle. conditions. All season tires are identified by tion about tire type, size, speed Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire side- rating and availability. Replace- ratings than factory equipped tires and may wall. Snow tires have better snow traction than ment tires may have a lower speed not match the potential maximum vehicle All season tires and may be more appropriate rating than the factory equipped speed. Never exceed the maximum speed in some areas. rating of the tire.

8-31

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy mation display on the monitor screen and conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of adjust pressure of each tire properly. (The remember that vehicle handling SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four order of the tire pressure figures displayed stability is reduced, which could wheels. on the screen does not correspond with lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long dis- the actual order of the tire position.) For additional traction on icy roads, studded tance at high speeds may damage tires may be used. However, some provinces ț If the vehicle is being driven with a flat tire the tire. To drive safely: and states prohibit their use. Check local, or very low tire pressure, the low tire • Do not drive at speeds above state and provincial laws before installing pressure warning system will activate and 55 MPH (88 km/h) and do not warn you of it by the low tire pressure studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of drive more than 50 miles (80 warning light or a WARNING displayed on studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, km) with a punctured run-flat the monitor screen. If this occurs, pull off may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tire. A punctured tire may the road to a safe location and stop the tires. burst and cause a serious vehicle as soon as possible. Check the tire accident, resulting in per- Run-flat tires pressure for all four wheels and adjust the sonal injury. If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, pressure. if a tire is flat, replace it with a you can continue driving to a safe location spare tire as soon as possible. • Drive safely at reduced even if they are punctured. Always use run-flat speeds. Avoid hard cornering or braking, which may cause tires of the same size on all four wheels. WARNING Mixing tire sizes or construction may reduce you to lose control of the vehicle handling stability. If necessary, con- vehicle. ț Although you can continue driving tact your INFINITI retailer for assistance. with a punctured run-flat tire, • If a rear tire is punctured, ț Frequently check the tire pressure infor-

8-32

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

Other types may damage your vehicle. Use ț replace it with a non- Have the punctured tire replaced chain tensioners when recommended by the punctured tire, especially by your INFINITI retailer as soon tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. when driving on rainy, snowy as possible, as the tire’s perfor- Loose end links of the tire chain must be or icy roads. mance capability is reduced. secured or removed to prevent the possibility ț of whipping action damage to the fenders or Always have punctured run-flat TIRE CHAINS tires replaced. underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord- your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi- CAUTION ing to location. Check the local laws before tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your installing tire chains. When installing tire vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle han- chains, make sure they are of proper size for dling and performance may be adversely ț Never install tire chains on a punc- affected. tured run-flat tire, as this could the tires on your vehicle and are installed damage your vehicle. according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class CAUTION ț Avoid driving over any projection “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted or pothole, as the clearance be- tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use ț Do not use tire chains on dry tween the vehicle and the ground Class “S” chains are designed to meet the roads. is smaller than normal. SAE standard minimum clearances between ț Never install tire chains on a ț Do not enter an automated car the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or T-type spare tire or a punctured wash with a punctured run-flat body component required to accommodate the run-flat tire, as this could damage tire. use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are deter- your vehicle. mined using the factory equipped tire size.

8-33

੬ 02.11.11/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

CHANGING WHEELS AND Tire wear and damage TIRES WARNING Tire rotation ț After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure. ț Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). ț Do not include the T-type spare IDI004 tire or any other small size spare IDI069M tire in the tire rotation. ț WARNING INFINITI recommends that tires be rotated For additional information re- every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). garding tires, refer to “Important ț Tires should be periodically in- Tire Safety Information” (US) or spected for wear, cracking, bulg- Wheel nut tightening torque: “Tire Safety Information” 80 ft-lb (108 N⅐m) ing, or objects caught in the tread. (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty If excessive wear, cracks, bulg- See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” Information booklet. ing, or deep cuts are found, the section for tire replacing procedures. tire should be replaced.

8-34

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

in the “10. Technical and consumer informa- ț The original tires have built-in tion” section for recommended types and wheels which have the same off- tread wear indicators. When wear sizes of tires and wheels. set dimension. Wheels of a dif- indicators are visible, the tire ferent offset could cause prema- should be replaced. ture tire wear, degraded vehicle WARNING handling characteristics and/or ț Improper service of the spare tire interference with the brake may result in serious personal ț The use of tires other than those discs/drums. Such interference injury. If it is necessary to repair recommended or the mixed use of can lead to decreased braking the spare tire, contact an autho- different brands, construction efficiency and/or early brake rized INFINITI retailer. (bias, bias-belted radial, run- pad/shoe wear. Refer to “Wheels ț For additional information re- flat), or tread patterns can ad- and tires” in the “10. Technical garding tires, refer to “Important versely affect the ride, braking, and consumer information” sec- Tire Safety Information” (US) or handling, ground clearance, tion of this manual for wheel off- “Tire Safety Information” body-to-tire clearance, tire chain set dimensions. (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty clearance, speedometer calibra- ț When a spare tire is mounted or a Information booklet. tion, headlight aim and bumper wheel is replaced, tire pressure height. Some of these effects may will not be indicated and the low lead to accidents and could result Replacing wheels and tires tire pressure warning system will in serious personal injury. When replacing a tire, use the same size, not function. Contact your ț If the wheels are changed for any speed rating and load carrying capacity as the INFINITI retailer as soon as pos- reason, always replace with original equipment tires. See “Specifications” sible for tire replacement and/or

8-35

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

should be balanced as required. corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of system resetting. pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. Wheel balance service should be per- ț Do not install a deformed wheel formed with the wheels off the vehicle. ț INFINITI recommends that the road wheels or tire even if it has been re- Spin balancing the driving wheels on the be waxed to protect against road salt in paired. Such wheels or tires vehicle could lead to transmission dam- areas where it is used during winter. could have unknown structural age. damage and could fail without Spare tire (T-type spare tire — if warning. ț For additional information regarding tires, so equipped) refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” When a spare tire is mounted (t-type or ț The use of retread tire is not recommended. (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) conventional), the low tire pressure warning in the INFINITI Warranty Information book- system will not function. ț For additional information re- let. garding tires, refer to “Important Observe the following precautions if the Tire Safety Information” (US) or Care of wheels T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an “Tire Safety Information” ț Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle accident. (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty to maintain their appearance. Information booklet. ț Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of WARNING Wheel balance the vehicle is washed. ț The T-type spare tire should be ț Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han- Do not use abrasive cleaners when wash- used only for emergency. It should dling and tire life. Even with regular use, ing the wheels. be replaced by the standard tire at wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they ț Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

8-36

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ DO-IT-YOURSELF

the first opportunity. 50 MPH (80 km/h). TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. ț Drive carefully while the TEMPO- ț When driving on roads covered RARY USE ONLY spare tire is with snow or ice, the TEMPO- installed. Avoid sharp turns and RARY USE ONLY spare tire CAUTION abrupt braking while driving. should be used on the front axle and original tire used on the rear ț Periodically check spare tire in- ț Do not use tire chains on a TEM- axle (drive wheels). Use tire flation pressure. Always keep the PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. chains only on the rear (original) pressure of the TEMPORARY USE Tire chains will not fit properly tires. ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 and may cause damage to the ve- kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep the ț Tire tread of the TEMPORARY hicle. pressure of the full size spare tire USE ONLY spare tire will wear at ț Because the TEMPORARY USE (if so equipped) at the recom- a faster rate than the original tire. ONLY spare tire is smaller than mended pressure for standard Replace the spare tire as soon as the original tire, ground clear- tires, as indicated on the tire the tread wear indicators appear. ance is reduced. To avoid dam- placard. For tire placard location, ț Do not use the spare tire on other age to the vehicle do not drive see “Tire placard” in the index of vehicles. over obstacles. Also do not drive this manual. the vehicle through an automatic ț Do not use more than one spare ț With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY car wash since it might get tire at the same time. spare tire installed do not drive caught. your vehicle at speeds faster than ț Do not tow a trailer when the

8-37

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ ੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 9 MAINTENANCE

General maintenance ...... 9-2 Schedule 1...... 9-5 Explanation of maintenance items ...... 9-3 Schedule 2...... 9-6 Periodic maintenance schedules ...... 9-5 Explanation of maintenance items ...... 9-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE

Your new INFINITI has been designed to have perform these procedures regularly as tion systems. They are completely qualified to minimum maintenance requirements with prescribed. work on INFINITI vehicles before work be- longer service intervals to save you both time gins. These checks or inspections can be done by and money. However, some day-to-day and yourself, a qualified technician or, if you You can be confident that your INFINITI re- regular maintenance is essential to maintain prefer, your INFINITI retailer. tailer’s service department performs the best your INFINITI’s good mechanical condition, as job to meet the maintenance requirements on well as its emission and engine performance. Periodic maintenance: your vehicle — in a reliable and economic It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure The maintenance items listed in this part are way. that the specified maintenance, as well as required to be serviced at regular intervals. general maintenance, is performed. However, under severe driving conditions, GENERAL MAINTENANCE additional or more frequent maintenance will During the normal day-to-day operation of the As the vehicle owner, you are the only one be required. vehicle, general maintenance should be per- who can ensure that your vehicle receives the formed regularly as prescribed in this section. proper maintenance care. You are a vital link Where to go for service: If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations in the maintenance chain. If maintenance service is required or your or smell, be sure to check for the cause or General maintenance: vehicle appears to malfunction, have the have your INFINITI retailer do it promptly. In systems checked and serviced by an INFINITI addition, you should notify your INFINITI General maintenance includes those items retailer. which should be checked during normal day- retailer if you think that repairs are required. to-day operation of the vehicle. They are INFINITI technicians are well-trained special- When performing any checks or maintenance ists and are kept up to date with the latest essential if your vehicle is to continue to work, see “Maintenance precautions” in the service information through technical bulle- operate properly. It is your responsibility to “8. Do-it-yourself” section. tins, service tips, and in-dealership informa-

9-2

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE

EXPLANATION OF MAINTE- Wheel alignment and balance: If the Also ensure that all latches lock securely. NANCE ITEMS vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a Lubricate hinges and latches if necessary. straight and level road, or if you detect uneven Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the Additional information on the following or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for hood from opening when the primary latch is items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it- wheel alignment. released. yourself” section. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal When driving in areas using road salt or other Outside the vehicle highway speeds, wheel balancing may be corrosive materials, check lubrication fre- The maintenance items listed here should be needed. quently. performed from time to time, unless otherwise For additional information regarding tires, Inside the vehicle specified. refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” The maintenance items listed here should be (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge at checked on a regular basis, such as when the INFINITI Warranty Information booklet. least once a month and always prior to long performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pres- Windshield: Clean the windshield on a vehicle, etc. sure in all tires, including the spare, to the regular basis. Check the windshield at least Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular pressure specified. Check carefully for dam- every six months for cracks or other damage. basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop age, cuts or excessive wear. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other qualified repair facility. Wheel nuts*: When checking the tires, make lights are all operating properly and installed sure no nuts are missing, and check for any Windshield wiper blades*: Check for securely. Also check headlight aim. loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every Doors and engine hood: Check that all that all warning lights and chimes are oper- 7,500 miles (12,000 km). doors and the engine hood, operate properly. ating properly.

9-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or lever in the P (Park) position without applying that the wipers and washer operate properly damage. any brakes. and that the wipers do not streak. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for Under the hood and vehicle Windshield defroster: Check that the air smooth operation and make sure the pedal The maintenance items listed here should be comes out of the defroster outlets properly does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep checked periodically (For example, each time and in sufficient quantity when operating the the floor mat away from the pedal. you check the engine oil or refuel). heater or air conditioner. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the Windshield washer fluid*: Check that Steering wheel: Check for changes in the vehicle to one side when applied. there is adequate fluid in the tank. steering conditions, such as excessive free Brake pedal*: Check the pedal for smooth play, hard steering or strange noises. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant operation and make sure it has the proper level when the engine is cold. Seats: Check seat position controls such as distance under it when depressed fully. Check Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to en- the brake booster function. Be sure to keep the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, sure they operate smoothly and that all latches floor mat away from the pedal. etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure lock securely in every position. Check that the Parking brake*: Check that the lever has the the hoses have no cracks, deformation, dete- head restraints move up and down smoothly rioration or loose connections. and that the locks (if so equipped) hold proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is securely in all latched positions. held securely on a fairly steep hill with only Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake the parking brake applied. fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat on the reservoir. belt system (For example, buckles, anchors, Automatic transmission P (Park) adjusters and retractors) operate properly and mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. smoothly, and are installed securely. Check your vehicle is held securely with the selector It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

9-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or the trouble and correct it. See “Precautions have it corrected immediately. under severe condition require frequent when starting and driving” in the “5. Starting checks of the battery fluid level. and driving” section for exhaust gas (Carbon PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt monoxide). To ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe and is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Underbody: The underbody is frequently economical driving, INFINITI provides two exposed to corrosive substances such as Engine oil level*: Check the level after different maintenance schedules that may be parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning those used on icy roads or to control dust. It used, depending upon the conditions in which off the engine. (Wait more than 15 minutes for is very important to remove these substances, you usually drive. These schedules contain the oil to drain back into the oil pan.) otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, both distance and time intervals, up to 60,000 frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust Power steering fluid level* and lines: miles (96,000 km)/48 months. For most system. At the end of winter, the underbody Check the level when the fluid is cold and the people, the odometer reading will indicate should be thoroughly flushed with plain wa- engine is turned off. Check the lines for proper when service is needed. However, if you drive ter, being careful to clean those areas where attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. very little, your vehicle should be serviced at mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional the regular time intervals shown in the sched- Cooling fan fluid level* and lines: Check information, see “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. ule. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or the level when the fluid is cold and the engine Appearance and care” section. 48 months, continue periodic mainte- is turned off. Check the lines for proper Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, nance at the same mileage/time inter- attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle vals. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no has been parked for a while. Water dripping loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound from the air conditioner after use is normal. If SCHEDULE 1 of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a you should notice any leaks or if gasoline Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate fumes are evident, check for the cause and your driving habits frequently include one or

9-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE more of the following driving conditions: none of the driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits. ț repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). ț repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ț operating in hot weather in stop- and-go rush hour traffic. ț extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. ț driving in dusty conditions. ț driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. ț towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier. SCHEDULE 2 Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if

9-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE

Schedule 1 Abbreviations: R = Replace, I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: Perform service at the mileage intervals only

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or (km x 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96) months, whichever comes first. Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR Engine oil filter (Use Part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR Air cleaner filter See NOTE (1) [R] [R] EVAP vapor lines I* I* Fuel lines I* I* Drive belts See NOTE (2) I* Engine coolant See NOTE (3) R* Spark plugs (PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km) Fuel filter See NOTE (4) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* See NOTE (5) NOTE: (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (2) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (4) Maintenance-free item (In-tank type fuel filter). (5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE

Schedule 1 Abbreviations: R = Replace, I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Nissan Genuine ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty. (2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.

9-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE

Schedule 2 Abbreviations: R = Replace, I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: Perform service at the mileage intervals only

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Engine oil RRRRRRRR Engine oil filter (Use Part No. 15208-31U00 or equivalent) RRRRRRRR Air cleaner filter [R] [R] EVAP vapor lines I* I* Fuel lines I* I* Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* Engine coolant See NOTE (2) R* Spark plugs (PLATINUM-TIPPED Type) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km) Fuel filter See NOTE (3) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* See NOTE (4)

NOTE: (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit. (2) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (3) Maintenance-free item (In-tank type fuel filter). (4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-9

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE

Schedule 2 Abbreviations: R = Replace, I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, (km x 1,000) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) whichever comes first. Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Brake lines & cables IIII Brake pads & rotors IIII Automatic transmission fluid & differential gear oil IIII Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts I I Tire rotation See NOTE (1) Exhaust system II In-cabin microfilter RRRR Climate controlled seat filter RR Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses IIII

NOTE: (1) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” earlier in this section.

9-10

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE

EXPLANATION OF MAINTE- are found, replace them. Brake pads & rotors: Check these and the other neighboring brake components for wear, NANCE ITEMS Fuel lines: Check the fuel hoses, piping and deterioration and leaks. Under severe driving Additional information on the following connections for leaks, looseness or deteriora- conditions, they may have to be inspected items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it- tion. Replace any parts if they are damaged. yourself” section. more frequently. Engine coolant*: Drain and flush the cooling Automatic transmission fluid & differen- Emission control system mainte- system. nance tial gear oil*: Using automatic transmission Engine oil & oil filter*: Under normal driv- fluid other than Nissan Genuine ATF Matic Drive belts*: Check drive belts for wear, fraying conditions, the engine oil and oil filter Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability ing or cracking and also for proper tension. Re- should be replaced in accordance with the and automatic transmission durability, and place the drive belts if found damaged or if the maintenance schedule. However, under severe may damage the automatic transmission, auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maxi- driving conditions, they may have to be re- mum limit. which is not covered by the INFINITI new ve- placed more frequently. hicle limited warranty. When checking or re- Air cleaner filter: Under normal driving con- Spark plugs*: Replace with new plugs hav- placement is required, we recommend your ditions, the air cleaner filter should be replaced ing the correct heat range. INFINITI retailer for servicing. in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, driving the vehicle in dusty areas Chassis and body maintenance Under severe driving conditions, the fluid or may cause more rapid clogging of the element. oil should be replaced at the specified interval. Brake lines & cables: Check the brake lines Consequently, the element may have to be re- and hoses (including brake booster vacuum Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspen- placed more frequently. hoses, connections & check valve) and parking sion parts: Check for damage, looseness and EVAP vapor lines: Check vapor lines and brake cables for proper attachment, leaks, leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving connections for failure or looseness. If leaks cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc.

9-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ MAINTENANCE conditions, more frequent inspection should be performed. Exhaust system: Visually check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc. Under severe driving conditions, inspection should be performed more frequently. In-cabin microfilter: Under normal conditions, the in-cabin microfilter should be replaced in accordance with the maintenance schedule. However, in some situations, the microfilter may clog more rapidly (depending on the air conditioner’s working environment). If this happens, the air flow may decrease, or the windows may fog up easily when the air conditioner is in use, the microfilter should be replaced immediately at your INFINITI retailer. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses: Check vacuum hose (between ASCD actuator and ASCD pump) for breakage, cracks or fracture.

9-12

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ ੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 10 TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

Capacities and recommended Vehicle identification number (Chassis fuel/lubricants ...... 10-2 number)...... 10-11 Fuel recommendation...... 10-3 Engine serial number ...... 10-11 Engine oil and oil filter F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-11 recommendation ...... 10-5 Emission control information label.... 10-12 Recommended SAE viscosity Tire placard ...... 10-12 number ...... 10-7 Air conditioner specification label...... 10-12 Air conditioning system refrigerant and Installing front license plate...... 10-13 lubricant recommendations...... 10-7 Vehicle loading information...... 10-14 Specifications ...... 10-8 Terms ...... 10-14 Engine...... 10-8 Determining vehicle pay load Wheels and tires ...... 10-9 capacity ...... 10-15 Dimensions and weights...... 10-9 Loading tips...... 10-15 When traveling or registering your vehicle in Towing a trailer...... 10-16 another country ...... 10-10 Maximum load limits...... 10-16 Vehicle identification...... 10-10 Towing safety ...... 10-17 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-20 Emission control system warranty...... 10-21 plate...... 10-10 Reporting safety defects (US only) ...... 10-21

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) In the event of a collision ...... 10-23 test (US only) ...... 10-22 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ...... 10-23

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended specifications US measure Imp measure Liter Fuel 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal 80 Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1 Engine oil (Drain and refill)*6 ț API Certification Mark*2, *3 With oil filter change 5-7/8 qt 4-7/8 qt 5.6 ț API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3 ț Without oil filter change 5-1/4 qt 4-3/8 qt 5.0 ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III*2, *3 Cooling system With reservoir 10-3/8 qt 8-5/8 qt 9.8 Genuine Nissan Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8 Cooling fan fluid Genuine Nissan PSF II or equivalent*4 Refill to the proper oil level according to the Power steering fluidinstructions in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section Genuine Nissan PSF II or equivalent*4 Brake fluid Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J*5 Differential gear oil — — — API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90*8 Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) Nissan A/C System Oil Air conditioning system lubricants Type S or equivalent *1: For additional information, see later in this section for fuel recommendation. *2: For additional information, see later in this section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation. *3: For additional information, see later in this section for recommended SAE viscosity number. *4: Genuine Nissan PSF, Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluids, DexronTMIII/MerconTM, or equivalent ATF may also be used. *5: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Nissan Genuine ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty. *6: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil. *7: Available in mainland US through your INFINITI retailer. *8: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F).

10-2

੬ 02.11.15/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION Gasoline containing oxygenates In order to maintain engine and exhaust CAUTION Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing system durability and performance, unleaded oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and premium gasoline with an octane rating of at Using a fuel other than that specified methanol with or without advertising their least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re- could adversely affect the emission presence. INFINITI does not recommend the search octane number 96) must be used. control system, and may also affect use of fuels of which the oxygenate content warranty coverage. If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITI regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 Under no circumstances should a cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask AKI number (Research octane number 91) leaded gasoline be used since this your service station manager. may be temporarily used, but only under the will damage the three way catalyst. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please following precautions: take the following precautions as the usage of ț Have the fuel tank filled only partially with Reformulated gasoline such fuels may cause vehicle performance unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor- problems and/or fuel system damage. unleaded premium gasoline as soon as mulated gasolines. These gasolines are spe- ț The fuel should be unleaded and possible. cially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. have an octane rating no lower than ț Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt ac- INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air that recommended for unleaded celeration and suggests that you use reformulated gaso- gasoline. line when available. ț If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygen-

10-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

ate. (MTBE may, however, be added Take care not to spill gasoline during re- ern Nevada, southern Idaho, western South up to 15%.) fueling. Gasoline containing oxygen- Dakota, western Nebraska, and that part of ates can cause paint damage. Texas which is directly south of New Mexico. ț If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol Aftermarket fuel additives Using unleaded gasoline with an octane (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It rating lower than stated above can INFINITI does not recommend the use of any should also contain a suitable cause persistent, heavy spark knock. fuel additives (Example: fuel injector cleaner, amount of appropriate cosolvents (Spark knock is a metallic rapping octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop- noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of erly formulated with appropriate damage. If you detect a persistent heavy these additives intended for gum, varnish or cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, spark knock even when using gasoline deposit removal may contain active solvent or such methanol blends may cause fuel of the stated octane rating, or if you hear similar ingredients that can be harmful to the steady spark knock while holding a system damage and/or vehicle per- fuel system and engine. formance problems. At this time, suf- steady speed on level roads, have your ficient data is not available to ensure Octane rating tips dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the ve- that all methanol blends are suitable In most parts of North America, you should hicle, for which INFINITI is not respon- for use in INFINITI vehicles. use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of sible. If any undesirable driveability problems such at least 87 or 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. However, you may use unleaded Incorrect ignition timing will result in knock- as engine stalling and hard hot starting are gasoline with an octane rating as low as 85 ing, after-run or overheating. This in turn may experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, AKI number in these high altitude areas [over cause excessive fuel consumption or damage immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Mon- to the engine. If any of the above symptoms or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. tana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeast- are encountered, have your vehicle checked at

10-4

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION an INFINITI retailer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

SIT0115

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER oil) in order to improve fuel economy and RECOMMENDATION conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as Selecting the correct oil they could cause engine damage. It is essential to choose the correct quality, Only those engine oils with the American and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine Petroleum Institute (API) certification mark on life and performance. INFINITI recommends the front of the container should be used. This the use of a low friction oil (energy conserving

10-5

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION type of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH tant that the engine oil viscosity be selected by improper maintenance or use of incorrect or SJ and Energy ConservingI&IIcategories. based on the temperatures at which the oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not vehicle will be operated before the next oil covered by the new INFINITI vehicle warran- If you cannot find engine oil with the API change. The chart of recommended SAE vis- ties. certification mark, use an API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving oil. An ILSAC grade GF-II cosity number shows the recommended oil Your engine was filled with a high quality & GF-III oil can also be used. viscosities for the expected ambient tempera- engine oil when it was built. You do not have tures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than to change the oil before the first recommended INFINITI recommends mineral based oils. that recommended could cause serious engine change interval. Oil and filter change intervals These oils must however, meet the API quality damage. depend upon how you use your vehicle. and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your Operation under the following conditions may vehicle. Selecting the correct oil filter require more frequent oil and filter changes. Your new vehicle is equipped with a high- Oil additives ț repeated short distance driving at cold quality genuine Nissan oil filter. When replac- INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil outside temperatures, ing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent additives. The use of an oil additive is not for the reason described in change intervals. ț driving in dusty conditions, necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Change intervals ț extensive idling, Oil which may contain foreign matter or has The oil and oil filter change intervals for your ț towing a trailer. been previously used should not be used. engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than Oil viscosity the specified quality, or oil and filter change The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes intervals longer than recommended could with temperature. Because of this, it is impor- reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused

10-6

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOS- all temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not ITY NUMBER viscosity oil may be used if the ambient affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain govern- temperature is above 0°F (−18°C). mental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM air conditioning system service. Your INFINITI REFRIGERANT AND LUBRI- retailer has the trained technicians and equip- CANT RECOMMENDATIONS ment needed to recover and recycle your air The air conditioning system in your conditioning system refrigerant. INFINITI vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and Contact your INFINITI retailer when servicing the lubricant, Nissan A/C system oil your air conditioning system. Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

SIT0002 The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s

10-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE

Model VK45DE Type Gasoline, 4-cycle Cylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-slanted at 90° Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.661 x 3.256 (93.0 x 82.7) Displacement cu in (cm3) 274.2 (4,494) Firing order* 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2* ITI003M Idle speed rpm See the emission control in- Ignition timing (BTDC) degree/rpm formation label on the underside of the hood. CO percentage at idle speed [No air] Standard PLFR5A-11 Spark plug Hot type PLFR4A-11 Cold type PLFR6A-11 Camshaft operation Timing chain Alternator belt size 0.841 x 76.38 Width x Length in (mm) (21.36 x 1,940) The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regu- lations.

10-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Sport/ Sedan Luxury Premium T-type Spare Overall length in (mm) 199.6 (5,070) Package Overall width in (mm) 72.6 (1,845) Road wheel Overall height in (mm) 58.7 (1,490) Aluminum 17 x 7.5JJ 18 x 7.5JJ — 62.2 (1,580), Steel — — 16 x 4T Front tread in (mm) 62.6 (1,590)* Offsetin (mm) 1.57 (40) 1.38 (35) 1.18 (30) 61.4 (1,560), Rear tread in (mm) P225/55R17 95V T145/90D16 61.8 (1,570)* Tire size P245/45R18 96V P225/55R17* 106M Wheelbase in (mm) 113.0 (2,870) *: Run-flat tire Option Gross vehicle weight lb (kg) rating See the F.M.V.S.S. certi- Gross axle weight rating fication label on the driv- Front lb (kg) er’s side lock pillar. Rear lb (kg)

*: P245/45R18 tire equipped model

10-9

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

WHEN TRAVELING OR REG- When any vehicle is to be taken into an- VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION other country, state, province or district ISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ANOTHER COUNTRY and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the re- NUMBER (VIN) PLATE If you plan to travel in another country, sponsibility of the user. INFINITI is not you should first find out if the fuel available is responsible for any inconvenience that suitable for your vehicle’s engine. may result. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of ITI014M your vehicle to another country, state, The vehicle identification number plate is province or district, it may be necessary to attached as shown. This number is the iden- modify the vehicle to meet local laws and tification for your vehicle and is used in the regulations. vehicle registration. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.

10-10

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LA- NUMBER (Chassis number) BEL

SIT0116 SIT0109 SIT0117 The number is stamped on the engine as The number is stamped as shown. shown. The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Re- view it carefully.

10-11

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

EMISSION CONTROL INFOR- TIRE PLACARD AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICA- MATION LABEL TION LABEL

SIT0072 SIT0110 SIT0112 The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire The emission control information label is placard located on the front face of the rear left The air conditioner specification label is at- attached as shown. wheel housing inside the vehicle. tached as shown.

10-12

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE Use the following steps to mount the license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag. ț License plate bracket ț J-nut x 2 ț Screw x 2 ț Screw grommet x 2 1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket while aligning part ࠗA of the front bumper with part ࠗB of the rear surface of the license plate bracket. SIT0111 2. To determine where to drill the hole, mark along both sides of the mounting hole by using a felt-tip pen. 3. Remove the license plate bracket and

10-13

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

connect the arcs to form ovals. Mark the VEHICLE LOADING INFOR- ț Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve- point in the center of each oval. These are MATION hicle) - vehicle weight including: standard the pilot drilling locations. and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight 4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 WARNING does not include passengers and cargo. inch (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be sure that the drill only ț It is extremely dangerous to ride in ț GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight goes through the fascia, or damage a cargo area inside the vehicle. In plus the combined weight of passengers to the nut may occur.) a collision, people riding in these and cargo. areas are more likely to be seri- ț GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - 5. Insert grommets into the hole on the ously injured or killed. fascia. maximum total weight (load) limit speci- ț Do not allow people to ride in any fied for the vehicle. 6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the area of vehicle that is not ț GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi- grommet hole to add 90° turn onto the part equipped with seats and seat mum weight (load) limit specified for the ࠗC . belts. front or rear axle. 7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket ț Be sure everyone in the vehicle is before placing the license plate bracket on in a seat with their seat belt the fascia. properly fastened. 8. Install the license plate bracket with screws. TERMS 9. Install the license plate with bolts that are It is important to familiarize yourself with the no longer than 0.55 inch (14 mm). following terms before loading your vehicle:

10-14

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

DETERMINING VEHICLE PAY GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex- ț LOAD CAPACITY ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove Do not load your vehicle any cargo as necessary. If either the front or heavier than the GVWR or the The pay load capacity of this vehicle is rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or maximum front and rear GAWRs. determined by weight, not by available cargo If you do, parts of your vehicle remove cargo as necessary. space. For example, a luggage rack, bike can break, or it can change the carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment LOADING TIPS way your vehicle handles. This does not increase load carrying capacity of ț The GVW must not exceed GVWR or could result in loss of control and your vehicle. cause personal injury. GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. To determine vehicle pay load capacity: certification label. ț Overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. Failures caused by Vehicle weight can be determined by using a ț Do not load the front and rear axle to the overloading are not covered by commercial-grade scale, found at places such GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR. the vehicle warranty. as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility. WARNING 1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. ț Properly secure all cargo to help 2. Compare the curb weight amount to the prevent it from sliding or shifting. GVWR specified for your vehicle to deter- Do not place cargo higher than the mine how much more weight your vehicle seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- can carry. lision, unsecured cargo could 3. After loading (cargo and passengers), re- cause personal injury. weigh your vehicle to determine if either

10-15

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

TOWING A TRAILER MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS jury resulting from improper towing Maximum trailer loads procedures are not covered by Never allow the total trailer load to exceed INFINITI warranties. An Infiniti 1,000 lb (454 kg). The total trailer load equals Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) trailer weight plus its cargo weight. Towing containing information on trailer loads greater than 1,000 lb (454 kg) or using towing ability and the special equip- improper towing equipment could adversely ment required may be obtained from an INFINITI retailer. affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. SIT0035 Tongue load The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is Your new vehicle was designed to be used not only related to the maximum trailer loads, Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11% of primarily to carry passengers and cargo. but also the places you plan to tow. Tow the total trailer load. If the tongue load Remember that towing a trailer will place weights appropriate for level highway driving becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, may have to be reduced on very steep grades for proper tongue load. drive train, steering, braking and other sys- or in low traction situations (for example, on tems. slippery boat ramps). Information on trailer towing and the special equipment required should be obtained from a WARNING professional trailer dealer/installer. Vehicle damage and/or personal in-

10-16

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART ț The hitch should not be attached Unit: lb (kg) to or affect the operation of the MAXIMUM 1,000 (454) TOWING LOAD impact-absorbing bumper. MAXIMUM ț 110 (49) Do not modify the vehicle exhaust TONGUE LOAD system, brake system, etc. to in- TOWING SAFETY stall a trailer hitch. ț Trailer hitch To reduce the possibility of addi- ITI002 tional damage if your vehicle is Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and struck from the rear, where prac- Maximum gross vehicle trailer. A genuine INFINITI trailer hitch is tical, remove the hitch and/or re- weight/maximum gross axle available from your INFINITI retailer (Canada ceiver when not in use. After the weight only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely hitch is removed, seal the bolt The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal holes to prevent exhaust fumes, must not exceed GVWR shown on the F.M. injury or property damage due to sway caused water or dust from entering the V.S.S. certification label. The gross vehicle by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass- passenger compartment. weight equals the combined weight of the ing trucks. ț Regularly check that all hitch unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, mounting bolts are securely trailer tongue load and any other optional CAUTION mounted. equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed GAWR shown on the ț Do not use axle-mounted hitches. F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

10-17

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

Tire pressures vehicle for towing, connect the stop and tail overload, worn suspension or other pos- light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at sible causes of either condition. ț When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle a point between the sensor and stop light tires to the recommended cold tire pres- ț Always secure items in the trailer to switch or light switch. sure indicated on the tire placard (located prevent load shifts while driving. on the front face of the rear left wheel Trailer brakes ț Be certain your rear view mirrors conform housing inside the vehicle). If your trailer is equipped with a braking to all federal, state or local regulations. If ț Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and system, make sure it conforms to federal not, install any mirrors required for towing proper inflation pressure should be in and/or local regulations and that it is properly before driving the vehicle. installed. accordance with the trailer and tire manu- Trailer towing tips facturers’ specifications. In order to gain skill and an understanding of Safety chains WARNING the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area Always use a suitable chain between your Never connect a trailer brake system vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be which is free from traffic. Steering stability, directly to the vehicle brake system. and braking performance will be somewhat crossed and should be attached to the hitch, different than under normal driving condi- not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to tions. leave enough slack in the chain to permit Pre-towing tips turning corners. ț Be certain your vehicle maintains a level ț Always secure items in the trailer to position when a loaded or unloaded trailer prevent load shift while driving. Trailer lights is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has ț Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. Trailer lights should comply with federal an abnormal nose-up or nose-down con- and/or local regulations. When wiring the dition; check for improper tongue load, ț Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

10-18

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

ț Always drive your vehicle at a moderate high temperature when the air conditioning passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for speed. system is on, turn off the air conditioner. possible changes in crosswinds that could Coolant heat can be additionally vented by affect vehicle handling. If swaying does ț Always block the wheels on both vehicle opening the windows, switching the fan occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer and trailer when parking. Parking on a control to high and setting the temperature straight ahead, and immediately (but slope is not recommended; however, if control to the HOT position. gradually) reduce vehicle speed. This you must do so, and if your vehicle is ț combination will help stabilize the vehicle. equipped with automatic transmission, Trailer towing requires more fuel than Never increase speed. first block the wheels and apply the park- normal circumstances. ing brake, and then move the transmission ț Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 ț Be careful when passing other vehicles. selector lever into the P (Park) position. If miles (800 km). Passing while towing a trailer requires you move the selector lever to the P (Park) considerably more distance than normal ț Have your vehicle serviced more often than position before blocking the wheels and at intervals specified in the recommended passing. Remember the length of the trailer applying the parking brake, transmission maintenance schedule. must also pass the other vehicle before damage could occur. you can safely change lanes. ț When making a turn, your trailer wheels ț ț When going down a hill, shift into a lower will be closer to the inside of the turn than To maintain engine braking efficiency and gear and use the engine braking effect. your vehicle wheels. To compensate for electrical charging performance, do not When ascending a long grade, downshift this, make a larger than normal turning use overdrive (automatic transmission). the transmission to a lower gear and radius during the turn. ț Avoid holding the brake pedal down too reduce speed to reduce chances of engine ț Crosswinds and rough roads will ad- long or too frequently. This could cause overloading and/or overheating. versely affect vehicle/trailer handling, pos- the brakes to overheat, resulting in re- ț If the engine coolant rises to an extremely sibly causing vehicle sway. When being duced braking efficiency.

10-19

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

When towing a trailer, change fluid in would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as the transmission more frequently. well on the government course as a tire vehicle tires is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and See “Periodic maintenance schedules” graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driving conditions, does not include acceleration cor- in the “9. Maintenance” section. nering hydroplaning or speak trac- and may vary significantly from the norm due tion characteristics. UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY to variations in driving habits, service prac- GRADING tices and differences in road characteristics DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality and climate. Temperature A, B and C Grades: All passenger car tires must conform Traction AA, A, B and C Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, to federal safety requirements in addition to and C. They represent a tire’s resistance to these grades. The traction grades from highest to lowest are heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the when tested under controlled conditions on a Quality grades can be found where applicable tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder measured under controlled conditions on tained high temperature can cause tire mate- and maximum section width. For example: specified government test surfaces of asphalt rial to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera- and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. ture A traction performance. Grade C corresponds to a performance level Treadwear which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. Treadwear grade is a comparative rating WARNING 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of based on tire wear rate when tested under performance on laboratory test wheels than controlled conditions on specified government The traction grade assigned to your the minimum required by law. test courses. For example, a tire graded 150

10-20

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

For Canada: Consumer Affairs Department WARNING Emission Control System Warranty 2880 Kilihau Street Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 Details of these warranties may be found with The temperature grade for this tire is other vehicle warranties in your Warranty REPORTING SAFETY established for a tire that is properly Information Booklet (Warranty and Roadside DEFECTS (US only) inflated and not overloaded. Exces- Assistance Information (Canada only)) that If you believe that your vehicle has a sive speed, under inflation, or exces- comes with your INFINITI. If you did not sive loading, either separately or in defect which could cause a crash or could receive a Warranty Information Booklet (War- cause injury or death, you should imme- combination, can cause heat ranty and Roadside Assistance Information build-up and possible tire failure. diately inform the National Highway Traf- (Canada only)), or it has become lost, you fic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in may obtain a replacement by writing to: addition to notifying INFINITI. EMISSION CONTROL ț INFINITI Division If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it SYSTEM WARRANTY Nissan North America, Inc. may open an investigation, and if it finds Your INFINITI is covered by the following Consumer Affairs Department that a safety defect exists in a group of emission warranties. P.O. Box 47038, Gardena, CA 90248-0191 vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy ț Nissan Canada Inc. campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be- For US: 5290 Orbitor Drive come involved in individual problems ț Emission Defects Warranty Mississauga, Ontario, between you, your retailer, or INFINITI. ț Emissions Performance Warranty L4W 4Z5 To contact NHTSA, you may either call (See Warranty Information Booklet for de- ț INFINITI Division the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- tails.) Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii, Ltd. 327-4236. You may also write to:

10-21

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transporta- If a powertrain system component is repaired pedal completely and keep it released for tion, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may at least 6 seconds. also obtain other information about motor be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a vehicle safety from the Hotline. the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready You may notify INFINITI by contacting of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at condition. If you cannot or do not want to our Consumer Affairs Department, toll- least 5 minutes. free, at 1-800-662-6200. perform the driving pattern, an INFINITI re- In Hawaii call 1-808-836-0888. tailer can conduct it for you. 4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running. READINESS FOR WARNING 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 INSPECTION/ km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST Always drive the vehicle in a safe and seconds. (US only) prudent manner according to traffic 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times. Due to legal requirements in some states, your conditions, and obey all traffic laws. vehicle may be required to be in what is called 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 the ready condition for an Inspection/ km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control minutes. system. until the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points between the C and H (nor- 8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission The vehicle is set to the ready condition when mal operating temperature). gear selector lever in the “P” or “N” it is driven through certain driving patterns. position. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 by ordinary usage of the vehicle. km/h), then quickly release the accelerator 9. Turn the engine off.

10-22

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more In the USA: 20770 Westwood Road time. Strongsville, OH 44136 For current pricing and availability of genuine 1-800-247-5321 If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the INFINITI Service Manuals for the 2000 preceding step. Any safe driving mode is model year and later, contact: In Canada: acceptable between steps. Do not stop the To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI engine until step 7 is completed. Tweddle Litho Company 1-800-639-8841 Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE www.nissan-techinfo.com contact your nearest INFINITI retailer. For the phone number and location of an INFINITI MANUAL ORDER INFORMA- For current pricing and availability of genuine TION retailer in your area call the INFINITI Satisfac- INFINITI Service Manuals for the 1999 tion Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingual A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the best model year and prior, see an INFINITI retailer, INFINITI representative will assist you. source of service and repair information for or contact: your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, Also available are genuine INFINITI Service illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. and Owner’s Manuals for older INFINITI mod- adjustment procedures, this manual is the 20770 Westwood Road els. Strongsville, OH 44136 same one used by the factory trained techni- IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION cians working at INFINITI retailers. Also avail- 1-800-247-5321 Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this able are genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, For current pricing and availability of genuine unlikely event, there is some important infor- and genuine INFINITI Service and Owner’s INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for the 2003 mation you should know. Many insurance Manuals for older INFINITI models. model year and prior, see an INFINITI retailer, companies routinely authorize the use of or contact: non-genuine collision parts in order to cut DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. costs, among other reasons.

10-23

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

Insist on the use of Genuine In- penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an finiti Collision Parts! accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in safeguards. Also, If you want your vehicle to be restored using non-genuine parts often show premature parts made to Infiniti’s original exacting speci- wear, rust and corrosion. fications — if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Why should you take a chance? Tell your insurance agent and your In over 40 states, the law says you must be repair shop to only use Genuine Infiniti advised if non-genuine parts are used to Collision Parts. Infiniti does not warrant repair your vehicle. And some states have non-Infiniti parts, nor does Infiniti’s warranty enacted laws that restrict insurance companies apply to damage caused by a non-genuine from authorizing the use of non-genuine part. collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can Using Genuine Infiniti Parts can help protect take action to protect yourself. your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of It’s your right! your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine Infiniti Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear ex- penses at the end of your lease. Infiniti designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will

10-24

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ 11 INDEX

A Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 5-36 Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-6 Anti-lock brake warning light ...... 2-9 ABS (Anti-lock brake system) ...... 5-36 Appearance care B Active damper suspention ...... 5-35 Exterior appearance care...... 7-2 Battery ...... 8-12 Active damper suspention mode select switch ...... 2-28 Interior appearance care...... 7-4 Battery saver system ...... 2-24 Aiming control, Headlights...... 2-22 Ashtrays (See cigarette lighters and ashtrays)...... 2-31 Battery replacement, (See remote keyless entry Air bag system, Front (See supplemental front air bag Audible reminders...... 2-16 system)...... 3-10 system)...... 1-14 Audio operation precautions...... 4-20 Before starting the engine ...... 5-9 Air bag warning labels ...... 1-21 Audio rear control switch ...... 4-33 Belts (See drive belts) ...... 8-14 Air bag warning light...... 1-21, 2-13 Audio system ...... 4-18 Brake Air cleaner housing filter...... 8-16 Audio rear control switch ...... 4-33 Air conditioner Steering wheel audio controls...... 4-32 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)...... 5-36 Air conditioner service...... 4-18 Autochanger Brake booster ...... 8-19 Air conditioner specification label...... 10-12 Compact Disc (CD)...... 4-30 Brake fluid...... 8-11 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant Automatic Brake pedal ...... 8-18 recommendations ...... 4-18, 10-7 Anti-glare inside mirror ...... 3-20 Brake pedal check...... 8-18 Air filter ...... 4-17 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)...... 8-10 Brake system...... 5-36 Automatic climate control ...... 4-13 Automatic transmission position indicator Parking brake check...... 5-16, 8-18 Operation (See automatic climate control)...... 4-13 light ...... 2-13 Parking brake operation...... 5-16 Rear control button ...... 4-17 Climate control...... 4-13 Warning light ...... 2-10 Alcohol, drugs and driving...... 5-6 Drive positioner...... 3-22 Break-in schedule ...... 5-32 Ambient temperature, Air conditioner...... 4-16 Driving with automatic transmission...... 5-7, 5-10 Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-9 Anchor point locations Seat positioner, seat ...... 3-22 Bulb replacement ...... 8-23 Top tether strap...... 1-41 Transmission selector lever lock release...... 5-15 Antenna ...... 4-34

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ INDEX

C Cold weather driving ...... 5-40, 5-41 Driving Compact Disc (CD) changer operation ...... 4-30 Cold weather driving...... 5-40, 5-41 Cabin air filter...... 4-17 Console box...... 2-33 Driving with automatic transmission...... 5-7, 5-10 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Control panel button functions...... 4-3 Precautions when starting and driving...... 5-2 Car phone or CB radio...... 4-35 Controls Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ...... 2-34 Audio rear control switch ...... 4-33 E Cargo net ...... 2-34 Heater and air conditioner controls (See automatic Economy, Fuel ...... 5-33 Cassette player (See audio system) ...... 4-29 climate control) ...... 4-13 Electric sunroof...... 2-37 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ...... 5-3 Steering wheel audio controls...... 4-32 CD care and cleaning...... 4-32 Coolant Emission control information label ...... 10-12 Child restraints ...... 1-32 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants .... 10-2 Emission control system warranty...... 10-21 Installation on front passenger seat ...... 1-42 Changing engine coolant...... 8-6 Engine Installation on rear seat center or outboard Checking engine coolant level...... 8-5 Before starting the engine...... 5-9 positions...... 1-35 Cooling fan fluid...... 8-11 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Precautions on child restraints...... 1-32 Corrosion protection...... 7-6 Changing engine coolant...... 8-6 Top tether strap anchor point locations...... 1-42 Cruise control, Intelligent cruise control system ...... 5-18 Changing engine oil ...... 8-8 With top tether strap...... 1-41 Cup holders ...... 2-32 Changing engine oil filter...... 8-9 Child safety...... 1-26 Checking engine coolant level...... 8-5 Child safety rear door lock...... 3-5 D Checking engine oil level ...... 8-7 Chimes, Audible reminders ...... 2-16 Coolant temperature gauge...... 2-5 Cigarette lighters and ashtrays...... 2-31 Daytime running light system ...... 2-23 Engine block heater ...... 5-43 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ...... 8-20 Dimensions and weights ...... 10-9 Engine compartment check locations...... 8-4 Cleaning exterior and interior...... 7-2, 7-4 Door open warning light ...... 2-11 Engine cooling system...... 8-5 Climate control, Automatic climate control...... 4-13 Drive belts...... 8-14 Engine oil...... 8-7 Clock...... 2-30 Drive positioner, Automatic ...... 3-22 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation...... 10-5

11-2

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ INDEX

Engine oil viscosity...... 10-6 FM-AM radio with cassette player and Compact Disc Odometer...... 2-4 Engine serial number...... 10-11 (CD) changer ...... 4-22 Speedometer...... 2-4 Engine specifications ...... 10-8 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint Tachometer...... 2-4 If your vehicle overheats...... 6-12 system)...... 1-14 General maintenance...... 9-2 Starting the engine...... 5-9 Front power seat adjustment ...... 1-2 Glove box...... 2-33 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...... 5-2 Fuel Glove box lock...... 2-33 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 F filler cap ...... 3-17 H filler lid...... 3-17 F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-11 Fuel economy...... 5-33 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 2-25 Filter, Air cleaner housing filter...... 8-16 Fuel economy information (display)...... 4-38 Head restraints...... 1-5 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)...... 2-25 Fuel octane rating ...... 10-3 Headlights Flat tire...... 6-2 Fuel recommendation...... 10-3 Aiming control ...... 2-22 Flat tire, Low tire pressure warning system...... 5-4 Gauge ...... 2-5 Bulb replacement ...... 8-24 Floor mat cleaning...... 7-4, 7-5 Fuses...... 8-20 Headlight switch...... 2-21 Fluid Fusible links ...... 8-20 Xenon headlights ...... 2-20 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)...... 8-10 Heated seats...... 2-26 Brake fluid...... 8-11 G Heater Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Automatic climate control ...... 4-13 Cooling fan fluid...... 8-11 Garage door opener, HomeLinkா Universal Engine coolant heater ...... 5-43 Engine coolant ...... 8-5 Transceiver...... 2-43 HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver ...... 2-43 Engine oil...... 8-7 Gas cap...... 3-17 Hood, release...... 3-11 Gauge...... 2-3 Power steering fluid...... 8-10 Horn ...... 2-26 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-5 Window washer fluid ...... 8-12 How to stop alarm, Vehicle security...... 2-17 Fuel gauge ...... 2-5

11-3

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INDEX

I Keys (Electronic ignition key)...... 3-2 Xenon headlights ...... 2-20 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement...... 8-25 Ignition switch ...... 5-6 L Loading information (See vehicle loading Automatic transmission models...... 5-7, 5-10 information)...... 10-14 Label, Air conditioner specification label...... 10-12 Key positions ...... 5-8 Lock Label, Emission control information label ...... 10-12 Immobilizer system...... 2-17 Door locks...... 3-3 Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-11 Indicator lights...... 2-13 Glove box lock...... 2-33 Labels Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System, Engine start ...... 5-8 Power door lock...... 3-3 Air bag warning labels...... 1-20 Inside Automatic anti-glare mirror ...... 3-20 Trunk lid lock opener lever ...... 3-12 Engine serial number...... 10-11 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ...... 10-22 Low fuel warning light...... 2-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN)...... 10-10 Instrument panel ...... 2-2 Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-11 LATCH system ...... 1-40 Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system ...... 5-18 Low tire pressure warning system ...... 5-4 License plate, Installing front license plate...... 10-13 Interior light replacement...... 8-25 Light M Interior lights ...... 2-40 Air bag warning light...... 1-21 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-16 Bulb replacement ...... 8-23 Maintenance ISOFIX child restraint ...... 1-40 Headlight switch...... 2-21 Battery ...... 8-12 Headlights Bulb replacement...... 8-24 Chassis and body ...... 9-11 J Interior lights...... 2-40 Emission control system...... 9-11 General maintenance...... 9-2 Jump starting...... 6-9 Personal lights ...... 2-41 Replacement ...... 8-23 Inside the vehicle...... 9-3 Maintenance information (display) ...... 4-38 K Trunk light...... 2-42 Vanity mirror lights...... 2-42 Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry system)...... 3-5 Warning/indicator lights and audible Outside the vehicle ...... 9-3 reminders ...... 2-9, 2-13 Periodic maintenance schedules...... 9-5

11-4

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ INDEX

Seat belt maintenance...... 1-32 Outside mirrors...... 3-21 Precautions Under the hood and vehicle...... 9-4 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ...... 6-12 Audio operation precautions...... 4-20 Meters and gauges ...... 2-3 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order Cruise control precautions...... 5-16 Mirror information...... 10-23 Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror...... 3-20 On child restraints ...... 1-32 P Outside mirror control ...... 3-21 On seat belt usage...... 1-23 Outside mirrors ...... 3-21 Precautions on supplemental restraint system...... 1-7 Parking Precautions when starting and driving...... 5-2 Brake check...... 8-18 N Push starting...... 6-12 Parking brake check...... 5-16 Parking brake operation...... 5-16 Net, Cargo net ...... 2-34 R Parking on hills ...... 5-16 New vehicle break-in ...... 5-32 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-34 Nissan vehicle Immobilizer System...... 2-16 Radio...... 4-18 Periodic maintenance schedules ...... 9-5 Audio rear control switch ...... 4-33 Personal lights...... 2-41 O Phone, Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-35 Car phone or CB radio...... 4-35 Power Steering wheel audio controls...... 4-32 Odometer...... 2-4 Front seat adjustment ...... 1-2 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US Oil Power door lock...... 3-3 only)...... 10-22 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Power outlet ...... 2-30 Rear audio control switch...... 4-33 Changing engine oil ...... 8-8 Power steering fluid...... 8-10 Rear control button, Air conditioner...... 4-17 Changing engine oil filter...... 8-9 Power steering system...... 5-35 Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-5 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-7 Power windows ...... 2-34 Rear power point ...... 2-30 Engine oil...... 8-7 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ...... 1-19 Rear seat adjustment ...... 1-4 Engine oil viscosity...... 10-6 Rear sun shade...... 2-39 Outside mirror control ...... 3-21 Rear sun shade cleaning ...... 7-5

11-5

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ INDEX

Rear view monitor...... 4-10 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ...... 1-19 Starting Registering your vehicle in another country ...... 10-10 Precautions on seat belt usage ...... 1-23 Before starting the engine...... 5-9 Remote keyless entry system ...... 3-5 Pregnant women ...... 1-28 Jump starting ...... 6-9 Reporting safety defects (US only)...... 10-21 Seat belt cleaning ...... 7-5 Precautions when starting and driving...... 5-2 Roadside assistance program...... 6-2 Seat belt extenders...... 1-32 Push starting...... 6-12 Rollover...... 5-6 Seat belt maintenance...... 1-32 Starting the engine...... 5-9 Run-flat tires ...... 6-3 Seat belts ...... 1-23 Steering Three-point type...... 1-28 Power steering fluid...... 8-10 Seat(s) S Power steering system...... 5-35 Heated seats...... 2-26 Steering wheel switch for audio controls...... 4-32 Seats...... 1-2 Safety Tilting steering wheel...... 3-19 Security system, vehicle security system...... 2-16 Child seat belts...... 1-26 Storage...... 2-32 Security systems (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System), Reporting safety defects (US only)...... 10-21 Sun shade...... 2-38 Engine start...... 2-17 Towing safety ...... 10-17 Rear sun shade ...... 2-39 Security systems (See vehicle security system) ...... 2-16 Seat Rear sun shade cleaning ...... 7-5 Servicing air conditioner (See automatic climate Belt warning light...... 1-22 Sun visors...... 3-20 control)...... 4-13 Belt warning light and chime ...... 2-13 Sunroof ...... 2-37 Servicing climate control...... 4-18 Seat adjustment Electric sunroof ...... 2-37 Shift lock release ...... 5-15 Front power seat adjustment ...... 1-2 Supplemental air bag warning labels...... 1-20 Shifting Rear seat adjustment...... 1-4 Supplemental air bag warning light ...... 1-21, 2-13 Automatic transmission...... 5-7, 5-10 Seat belt(s) Supplemental front air bag system ...... 1-14 Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front seats ...... 1-30 Child safety ...... 1-26 Supplemental restraint system...... 1-7 Spark plugs...... 8-15 Infants and small children ...... 1-27 Precautions on supplemental restraint system...... 1-7 Speedometer ...... 2-4 Injured persons ...... 1-28 Suspension Larger children...... 1-27 Active damper suspension...... 5-35

11-6

੬ 02.7.3/F50-D ੭ INDEX

Active damper suspension mode select switch... 2-28 Low tire pressure warning system...... 5-4 Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system) ...... 3-5 Switch Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-11 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another Active damper suspension mode select switch... 2-28 Run-flat tires ...... 6-3 country ...... 10-10 Audio control ...... 4-32 Tire pressure information (display) ...... 4-39 Trip computer information (display) ...... 4-37 Audio rear control switch ...... 4-33 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-20 Trunk Hazard warning flasher switch...... 2-25 Tires Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-16 Headlight aiming control ...... 2-22 Tire chains ...... 8-33 Lid lock opener lever...... 3-12 Headlight switch...... 2-21 Tire placard...... 10-12 Light ...... 2-42 Ignition switch...... 5-6 Tire pressure...... 8-29 Turn signal switch...... 2-25 Ignition switch automatic transmission Tire rotation...... 8-34 models...... 5-7, 5-10 Types of tires...... 8-31 U Power door lock switch ...... 3-5 wheel/tire size ...... 10-9 Turn signal switch...... 2-25 Wheels and tires ...... 8-29 Underbody cleaning...... 7-3 Top tether strap child restraints...... 1-40 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-20 T Towing Tow truck towing...... 6-13 V Tachometer ...... 2-4 Towing a trailer...... 10-16 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature Towing load/specification chart...... 10-16 Vanity mirror lights...... 2-42 gauge ...... 2-5 Towing safety...... 10-17 Vehicle Theft (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine Trailer towing...... 10-16 Dimensions and weights...... 10-9 start ...... 2-17 Transceiver, HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver ...... 2-43 Identification number (VIN)...... 10-10 Three way catalyst ...... 5-3 Transmission Loading information...... 10-14 Tilting steering wheel ...... 3-19 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)...... 8-10 Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)...... 6-15 Tire Driving with automatic transmission...... 5-7, 5-10 Security system...... 2-16 Flat tire...... 6-2 Transmission selector lever lock release ...... 5-15 Ventilators ...... 4-12

11-7

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ INDEX

Voice-activated control system (VACS) ...... 4-40 Weights (See dimensions and weights)...... 10-9 Wheel/tire size ...... 10-9 W Wheels and tires...... 8-29 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels...... 7-4 Warning labels, Air bag warning labels...... 1-20 Window washer fluid ...... 8-12 Warning light Window(s) Air bag warning light...... 1-21, 2-13 Cleaning ...... 7-3 Anti-lock brake warning light ...... 2-9 Power windows ...... 2-34 Brake warning light...... 2-10 Windshield wiper and washer switch...... 2-19 Door open warning light...... 2-11 Wiper Low fuel warning light...... 2-11 Windshield wiper and washer switch...... 2-19 Low tire pressure warning light...... 2-11 Wiper blades ...... 8-16 Seat belt warning light and chime ...... 2-13 X Warning lights ...... 2-9 Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch...... 2-25 Xenon headlights ...... 2-20 Warning, Low tire pressure warning system...... 5-4 Warning, Warning indicator (See vehicle information)...... 4-36 Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ...... 2-9 Warranty, Emission control system warranty...... 10-21 Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer switch...... 2-19 Washing ...... 7-2 Waxing ...... 7-2

11-8

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ GAS STATION See “Capacities and recommended INFORMATION CAUTION fuel/lubricants” in the “10. Technical and consumer information” section for engine oil FUEL RECOMMENDATION: and oil filter recommendation. Under no circumstances should a In order to maintain engine and exhaust leaded gasoline be used since this COLD TIRE PRESSURES: system durability and performance, unleaded will damage the three way catalyst. premium gasoline with an octane rating of at See tire placard located on the front face of the least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re- Using a fuel other than that specified rear left wheel housing inside the vehicle. could adversely affect the emission search octane number 96) must be used. NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PRO- control system, and may also affect If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded CEDURES RECOMMENDATION: the warranty coverage. regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of AKI number (Research octane number 91) vehicle use, follow the recommendations out- For additional information, see “Capacities may be temporarily used, but only under the lined in the “Break-in schedule” in the “5. and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “10. following precautions: Starting and driving” section. Follow these Technical and consumer information” section. ț Have the fuel tank filled only partially with recommendations for the future reliability and unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDA- economy of your new vehicle. unleaded premium gasoline as soon as TION: possible. ț API Certification Mark ț Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt ac- ț API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving celeration ț ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III ț SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures.

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭ Windshield washer fluid 8-12

Engine oil 8-7 Battery 8-12 Engine coolant 8-7 Brake fluid 8-11 Power steering fluid 8-10 Meters and gauges 2-3 Automatic transmission fluid 8-10 Driver supplemental air bag 1-7 Front passenger supplemental air bag Hood release 3-11 1-7 Air conditioner 4-13 Audio system 4-18 Trunk lid release 3-13 Fuel filler lid release 3-14 Seat belt 1-22

Door lock 3-3

Supplemental side air bag 1-7 Supplemental side air bag Supplemental curtain side-impact 1-7 air bag 1-7 Supplemental curtain side- impact air bag 1-7

Fuel filler lid release 3-17, Fuel recommendation 10-3

Spare tire 6-3, 8-36

SIT0113

੬ 02.6.26/F50-D ੭